Home

MW100 Data Acquisition Unit User`s Manual

image

Contents

1. For B12 B35 1 0 20 Jumper setting switch CH1 to CH4 3 0 410 AG 510 Connect CH2 No 1 R2 only No 2 BL Dk e 0 R1 R4 No 3 ev 7 0 No 4 Rs H D H 8 0 No 5 9 0 OFF ON 1010 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 1110 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON 12 0 13 14 1510 1610 For NDI R1 R3 o lo Connect CH2 only O 8 amp 5 R2 I R4 Bridge head 319300 When calibrating the output range of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output module All eight channels are calibrated at Zero 0 V and Full 10 V S C C C C CX c c IM MW100 01E eoueueojure y pue Punoouse qno4j 4 4 Calibration Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples Required Instruments DC Voltage Current Standard Must meet the following specifications 5520A by FLUKE or equivalent Output accuracy 0 005 1uV or less 0 C reference temperature device Must meet the following specifications ZC 114 ZA 10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent Standard temperature stability accuracy 0 05 C or less Reference Junction Compensation of Thermocouple Input Normally the input terminal
2. 3 42 IM MW100 01E 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Display Groups Settings 1 From the top screen click Display Setting gt Group Setting 2 Select the group you wish to set from the Display Group list 3 Enterthe group name in the Group Name box using up to fifteen characters 4 Enter the channel numbers you wish to assign to the group in the Channel Set box Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001 003 005 or specify a range as in 004 008 Up to twenty channels one hundred characters can be specified 5 Click the Apply button NENNEN e So ee O p2 foroupo2 onsas oS fs feou menoa a Gouna oro s oos mro Apply Trip Line Setting 1 Fromthe top screen click Display Setting Trip Line Setting 2 Selectthe group number you wish to set from the Display Group list 3 Turn ON the line you wish to display in the Display list 4 Select the color you wish to display in the Color list Color samples are shown toward the bottom of the screen 5 Specify a percentage for the position of the trip line in the Trip Point box 100 is the scale maximum in the trend display and 096 is the minimum 6 Click the Apply button A No Display Color Trip Point 1 Jon z RED bd fes 2 Jon bd JveLLow so IE Jon bd BLUE rs Coe ck Iz brown
3. If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is x0 3 mm IM MW100 01E 5 23 uoneoyioedg eo 5 3 Base Plate Specifications Number of main modules that can be attached 1 always attached Number of input output modules that can be attached 1 to 6 specified by the suffix code External dimensions Approx 118 to 408 W x 75 H x 35 D mm Weight Approx 0 37 kg 1 main module for connecting six input output modules External Dimensions Units mm MX150 1 2 3 4 5 6 407 5 1 main module for connecting six input output modules 58 pitches in between 117 5 1 main module for connecting one input output module 22 5 O EE O TE O O EES O O EEE YOCONA O Made depen H O 34 6 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm Attaching the MW100 Main Module The accessory bracket must be attached in order to attach the MW100 main module to the base plate For information about attaching the bracket see the Installation and Connection Guide IM MW100 72E 5 24 IM MW100 01E 5 4 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Style number S1 Type of measurement
4. Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E111 Invalid channel number for alarm event Set an input module or MATH channel number E112 Invalid relay number for relay event Set the channel number for the DO module E113 Invalid action type Enter a correct action type E114 Invalid combination of edge and level detection Set the edge and level detection types to something different actions E115 Invalid combination of level detection actions Set events of different types to different actions in level detection E116 Invalid flag number Enter a correct flag number E120 Invalid measurement group number Set the measurement interval so that meas gr 1 lt meas gr 2 lt meas gr 3 The maximum allowable ch for 10 ms measurement is 10 and for 50 ms 30 E121 Invalid measurement group number for MATH Set math interval to a measurement group of 100 ms or longer interval When performing measurement by input module set the measurement group number for executing measurement E130 Size of data file for measurement group 1 Set the number of saved channels recording interval and exceeds the upper limit recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 1 does not exceed 10 MB E131 Size of data file for measurement group 2 Set the number of saved channels recording interval and exceeds the upper limit recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 2 does not exceed 10 MB E132 Siz
5. sess 3 31 Computation and Recording According to Status sse 3 31 Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators 3 31 Network Utility Settings A cei od eee MD er ine ndi a 3 32 DNS Client Settings re e ecran e ER LE as Re eter adel 3 32 FTP Client Settings oo otto eee EDAD eM 3 32 Mail Glient Settings tti eo aene e Ee rius 3 33 Time Synchronization Client Settings sessseeeeeeeeeenneene 3 34 Server Settings zre sleds wl er c e e apap tere t ie a e PE pa 3 35 Saving and Loading Setup Data ssssssssseeeeeneneenenenen nennen nnns 3 36 Saving and Loading Setup Data sesssssseeeeneneeenneneee nennen 3 36 Setup Data Save Conditions issiran onered ennd a 3 36 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings eseeeneeeenene 3 37 Monitor Display of Measured Data esssseeeneneene nemen 3 37 Explanation of Display Items esseeeenneeeennm eene 3 38 Display Settings t cete etd aieo eucntas decessit 3 41 log Information o e UR ORO ERE 3 44 Chapter 4 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions ssseussss 4 1 Errors upori Start p x Gto RERUM ERA 4 1 SII E M 4 1 ModuleErrots 1 1 dd i ene iiem 4 1 Communication EIOS ecu i en Set oes et eh a 4 2 Settings Errors 54a eec e t
6. sesssseeeeneeeeeneneee nennen 3 11 3 4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured Computed Data ssessss 3 13 Measurement Operation Settings essssseeeeeeeeeeee nennen 3 13 Computation Operation Settings sess 3 13 Recording Operation Settings ssssssesseeeeenee ennemi 3 14 Thinning Operation Settings sssssssssseseeeeeeneneee nennen nennen 3 15 Recording Channel Settings eataa aae a aa Ea aa AA aE e aa aha aea aa aniis 3 15 3 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Measurement Channel Settings 3 16 Measurement Channel Settings esssssseseeneeeeeneneneenennne 3 16 Filter and Thermocouple Settings seeeeneeneeneneen 3 17 Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing eesesess 3 17 3 6 MATH Settings MATH Channel Settings and the M1 Option sssssss 3 18 Entering EXpreSSiOnS s eerie incer e tet bete veo ee av t e p S ES 3 18 Setting MATH Constans ieu Le DE RED en ra dence Ere cci Dag 3 19 Setting MATH Group ss deccm eei m be Po HG Tra Sea e t Gu EG EP DOR UE EXE ces 3 19 Program Channel Settings esssesessssessesseeeeennee nnne 3 20 Communication Input Data Settings ssssssseeeeeeeeeeneenee nenne 3 20 IM MW100 01E xiii Contents 3 7
7. address setting software ssssssseees adjacent 2 gauge method 2 administrator privileges eee cee eee cess eerste eeeeeeee alarm ack eniti alarm channel Set eie censes alarm hold non hold sese alarm notification ue alarm output TIMING nies cuoc etr ert titer chere alarm setting Al DI ina iuit enne entr trn alarm setting MATH ae alarm status hold alarm summaries T alarms eonia aeia ada Orn psp A E E AN allowable input voltage esee ambient storage humidity ambient storage temperature antistatic metal ju arithmetic f nctlons tbe eed attaching the modules sese attachment procedure aUtO ZONE HR HE B bar grapli iuit rr eite ene enne nota base plate usi unieenkt eue nihi basic math baud rate browser DUIS c ica cicer sede vat sare cui crassus das seo a ena Pei mrt c oro C Page calibration of temperature measurements 4 16 calibration procedure seeee calibration software sicn capacity of the CF card CF Card soseoieoc pue pamenai inm eei channel numbers essssssseseeeeseeeennee nennen channel setting chattering CLOG computation CLOG functions seiccicsccsiicvisteasecssiscesscseastescsessceessteorisseedeeser command Ou
8. If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 5 40 IM MW100 01E 5 9 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module Specifications Style number Number of outputs Update interval Output types Rated output range S2 8 100 ms minimum not synchronized to the measurement interval DC voltage DC current external 24 V power supply required when using current output Voltage 10 to 10 V Current 0 to 20 mA sourcing for 1 to 5 V output 4 to 20 mA is output Maximum allowable output range Load impedance Accuracy Output resolution Voltage 11 to 11 V Current 0 to 22 mA Voltage 5 kQ or more Current 600 Q or less x 0 296 of F S at the rated output range or less F S 10 V or 20 mA However for current output accuracy is met at 1 mA or more The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions Ambient temp 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC power frequency 50 60 Hz 196 warm up time at least 30 minutes without adverse conditions such as vibrations 12 bits of F S or more Resolution 10 000 V to 10 000 V 1 mV resolution 0 000 mA to 20 000 mA 144A resolution Effects of ambient temperature 50 ppm of Setting 50 ppm of F S per degree 1 C or less F S 10 V or 20 mA External power supply 24 V 10 required when using current output Insulation resistance Withstan
9. B12 B35 NDI Jumper setting switch RgA V No 1 0 No 2 B L Q No 3 mall RgaccV 0 No 5 D H OFF ON Bridge head 319300 No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON OFF OFF ON Opposing 2 Gauge Method Y Ark fixed resistance resistance value of lead wire resistance value of strain gauge output voltage from bridge voltage applied to bridge B12 B35 NDI Jumper setting switch POLANYI AT 0 319300 dose not support the No 1 opposing 2 gauge method No2 l BONI 10 No 3 No 4 fl C V No 5 v 0 Rg2 D H N OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON OFF ON OFF ON 2 12 IM MW100 01E 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Opposing 2 Gauge 3 Wire Method Rg1 B12 B35 Cannot be connected Use NDI NDI Bridge head 319300 R fixed resistance fixed resistance resistance value of lead wire resistance value of strain gauge output voltage from bridge voltage applied to bridge r resistance value of lead wire Rg resistance value of strain gauge e output voltage from bridge E voltage applied to bridge
10. 1 13 hold operation eoe tert treten nein 1 42 in progress display eeeeeeeeen initial balancing eese initialization of the CF card initialization procedure eene initialization type eese initializing settings eeeeene input frode e iecore tette tee e n ees input output modules installation installation location sessssseeeeeeenneen installation procedures seen instrument number integrating A D converter integration time internet explorer 5 5 eene IP ADOC SS A A PETERE PEE PRECES keep alive function eere 3 35 key lock function seeseeseesesseeeeee 1 10 5 20 key lock status key OperatlOn oerte en e n neni e eene L Page rim 4 17 limit for Media alarm onere 3 14 list of services loading settings log information logical operations ssseeeenen login f nctior 7 iere tente rrt ntn loss of computed data low limit on rate of change alarm low pass filter lower limit alarm oe eee eceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeneeeeseneeeees
11. C C c c B12 B35 Jumper setting switch A V No 1 Rg1 No 2 B L No 3 Rg4 Rg2 No 4 Ras V No 5 D H OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON Rgi Rg2 Rg3 Rg4 Bridge head 319300 IM MW100 01E 2 13 Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Wiring Digital Input Modules Note e With digital input modules the terminal and open terminals on all channels are shorted internally e When the screw terminal plate model 772080 is connected to the Digital Input Module the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp terminals so wire according to the markings on the terminal cover Wiring with the D05 Option Wi Contact input Transistor input 5V logic input T Main Input Specifications D05 Input type DI non voltage contact open collector and 5 V logic Input format Pull up at approx 5 V approx 5 KQ common potential between channel Min detection pulse width Twice the sampling interval or more Input threshold level No voltage contact open collector 100 Q or less ON 100 kQ or less OFF 5 V logic OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or greater Contact Transistor rating Contact with a rating of 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or greater Transistor with a rating of Vce gt 15 VDC and Ic gt 30 mA Terminal type Clamp Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm A
12. Computation start Starts broken line computation from the held elapsed time Computation stop Holds the broken line computed value Computation clear O clear the elapsed time and start the broken line computation from the beginning Computation reset During self computation O clear the elapsed time and start the broken line computation Operation after Elapsed Time Mode Notation Program channel operation Single SINGLE Holds the broken line computed value of the last point Repeat REPEAT Returns to the start point then repeats broken line Computation Operation Starting and Stopping Computation Execution of computation starts and stops according to user commands Start Stop key Event Action function or monitor screen settings Computed Values Clear Clears all MATH channel data including MATH alarms per the Event Action function communication commands or requests from the monitor setting screen Computed Value Reset Clears all MATH channel data including MATH alarms per the Event Action function communication commands or requests from the monitor setting screen If this request occurs during a computation it is executed on the next computation interval and computation starts Also if the request occurs while the computation operation is stopped it is cleared when computation starts IM MW100 01E 1 47 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Math Interval Math Span G
13. Command settings Up to 100 commands can be set Command items Loading channels C001 toC300 Writing channels 001 to 060 A001 to A300 C001 to C300 Address 1 to 247 Input registers 30001 to 39999 300001 to 365535 Hold registers 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 Type Type Description INT16 Signed 16 bit integer UINT16 Unsigned 16 bit integer INT32 B Signed 32 bit integer from upper to lower INT32 L Signed 32 bit integer from lower to upper UINT32 B Unsigned 32 bit integer from upper to lower UINT32 L Unsigned 32 bit integer from lower to upper FLOAT B 32 bit floating decimal from upper to lower FLOAT L 32 bit floating decimal from lower to upper 5 12 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Modbus Slave Function Supported function The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows Function Code Function Operation 3 Read hold registers MW100 read communication input data 4XXXX 16 written by function code 6 or 16 4 Read Input registers MW100 reads the main instruments SXXXX measured computed and time data 6 Simple write to hold MW100 writes to the main instrumentls registers 4XXXX communication input data 8 Loop back test MW100 performs the loop back test on the main instrument Main instrument only support message return diagnostic code 0x00 16 Write to hold registers MW10
14. OVER preset value Handling Abnormal Data Abnormal Data Types Output value Data upon startup Preset value or previously held value can be selected Data upon error occurrence Preset value or previously held value can be selected x OVER 5 of output Full Span OVER 5 of output Full Span OVER conditions When the input channel is OVER in the case of transmission output When outside the range of voltage 11 V to 11 V or current 0 mA to 22 mA accuracy assured at 1 mA or more 5 42 IM MW100 01E 5 10 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Specifications Style number S2 Number of outputs 8 Update interval 100 ms minimum not synchronized to the measurement interval Output interval 1 ms to 300 s can be set channel by channel However 1 ms interval setting range 1 ms to 30 000 s can be set in units of 1 ms 10 ms interval setting range 10 ms to 300 00 s can be set in units of 10 ms Output types Pulse width Update timing After receiving change command duty is changed from falling of the next interval Pulse interval accuracy 100ppm of Setting External power supply 4 to 28V Insulation resistance Between output terminals and earth terminal 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Across output terminals non isolated Withstand voltage 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between the output terminal and earth Across output terminals non isolated Duty resolution 1 ms interval setting range 12000 10
15. Preset value hold prev value Holds the last output value active before the error occurs for the next time an error occurs Preset value setting changes No changes as above Change setting of output ch from Enabled Disabled Holds the output value last output value Changes are also applied to inactive channels Output Operation through Setting Changes Individually by Output Setting Output Setting Setting Changes Contents Output Operation Transmission Range setting AO V amp mA Output value held output Within changes PWM 1 ms lt 10 ms or interval Until the next output event units Operation Transmission within units setting changes command output Span setting changes Command Range setting AO V lt mA Output value held output changes PWM 1 ms amp 10 ms or interval Until the next output event Operation Command output setting changes transmission within a unit When the range settings of a PWM output module are changed the output value is not held IM MW100 01E 1 39 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Steady Output Operation Output Operation When Connected for Communication Communication Connection Status Output Operation Normal connection initial connection after power ON Operation when power is turned ON Comm
16. M Page mail client settings eene 3 33 Main Module a Main Module Specifications sssssssssss malin protocols ern eren nenne rea dee n ga s match time sesssseseeeee math channel settings math clear math constants recette eee math error data processing seeeeeee 1 49 math function math function specifications sese 5 8 math groups entrent te terrenae math interval math interval settings math operation math output value oo eee cece ceee eee eeeeeeeaeeteeeseeeseaeeneaes math reference channels c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeetes 1 46 math reset ssse math settings math span mathi startz cie mts MAU SOPs cen ceutsaresttarrciespecearnsiaveeraveedcectenees math types oo eee eeeeeeeeees maximum allowable output range 5 41 maximum input voltage 5 27 5 31 5 34 5 40 measured data sessssssessssseseeeeeeeetn nennt 1 17 Index 2 IM MW100 01E Index IMGASUEMENE cecinere es ectv reed eere ire oretenus measurement channel settings measurement conditions S measurement group settings ssssessssssss measurement groups sssssssseseeeneneeeeen nnns measurement input types 1 23 1 26 1
17. sseseseeneee 3 25 operation upon startup and error occurrence opposing 2 gauge 3 wire method opposing 2 gauge method 2 12 Optional accessories recette vii order of operations in expressions eesssse 1 46 OS operating system output action setting output channel uae output formal eic teretes cec tecti rote tas output method sc cess erence r cei output on disabled channels output operation during calibration 1 36 output operation per settings and setting changes 1 38 output operation settings ssssseeeeeess output range sssssssseen mnn output range settings analog output output range settings PWM output sss Outptiit relay8 o ciere ie trier ti ertet e etse uer aides output types 1 96 1 37 1 42 3 23 5 41 5 43 output update interval ssssse 1 36 1 37 1 42 output upon startup and error occurrence 1 38 output waveform sssssseeseseeeeeeeneee nennen 1 37 P parity CHO CK q PASV mode 5 recie rte ote UE E P PC hardware PC software sssssssssssssseseeeeeeneeneeeenee tenentes perlodie report e narii cr c eer eed OR RR REN pin assignments
18. 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C 0 1 C Cu10 GE high resol tion 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N 200 0 to 300 0 C high resolution 0 1 of rdg 0 7 C 0 2 of rdg 2 5 C 0 1 C Quio WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C high resolution Cu10 BAILEY ihithrresolirion 200 0 to 300 0 C Pt100 high noise resistance 2200 0 to 250 0 C 0 0595 of rdg 0 3 C 5 z E JPH00 high nose resistance 200 0 to 250 076 gt oa 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C M Cu100 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu50 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu10 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 7 C 0 2 of rdg 0 5 C 0 1 C DI Level Vth 2 4 V Threshold level accuracy 0 1 V Contact input ON for 100 Q or less OFF for 10 kQ or more 1 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 2 SAMA DIN 3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE 84 4 to 170 0 C Cu10 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Cu10 WEED 20 0 to 250 0 C Cu10 BAILEY 20 0 to 250 0 C 5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10 uA at 200 mV range Threshold level is approximately 0 1 V Measurement interval integration time and filter Measurement Integration Interval Time Fil
19. DC voltage current standard IM MW100 01E 4 4 Calibration When calibrating the RTD range of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input module When calibrating 0 Q When calibrating a range other than 0 Q Carry out calibration for each input terminal Input terminal Make the resistance of three lead wires equal When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input module X When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 600 mV range connect 300 to the input terminal of CH5 pons DENTAL RESSTANCE BO When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 60 mV range connect 60 Q to o the input terminal of CH6 When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 200 mV range connect 200 Q to the input terminal of CH4 ooO000 o0000 F o0000 00000 IM MW100 01E eoueuejure y pue BunooysajqnoiL 4 4 Calibration When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Input module When calibrating the RTD or resistance range of the 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input module Short the input terminal of CH3 connect 0 Q When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 20 mV range connect 20 to the input terminal of CH4 When calibrating
20. E140 Upper and lower limits of the display zone cannot Set the upper and lower limits of display zone to a different be equal value E141 Cannot set smaller value than lower limit of Set a larger value for the upper limit than that of the lower limit display zone for upper limit E142 Width of display zone must be 5 of that of the Set the upper and lower limits so that the difference between entire display or more them is 596 or more E145 Incorrect display group format Enter a display group of the correct format E146 Too many channels for display group Set 20 or fewer channels for a single group E150 IP address must belong to class A B or C Set an IP address belonging to class A B or C E151 Net or host part of IP address is all 0 s or 1 s Set a valid combination of IP address and subnet mask E152 Invalid subnet mask Enter a setting according to your network E153 Invalid gateway address Make sure that the net part of the IP address and default gateway match E160 Incorrect alarm e mail channel format Specify a channel using the correct format E165 Invalid channel number for Modbus command Enter a correct channel E166 Invalid combination of start and end channel for Set the first and last channel to the same type Modbus command 4 4 IM MW100 01E 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E167 Invalid sequence of start and end channel f
21. either nnne nini PPOBRS S6tVOl scs xci rm Fr ERE Ee HA dane power consumption viderer o EET power failure notification eseseeeeeeeee power ON operation power supply power supply terminal z olgem idt la dE EEEE EET T svt endens preset ValUG cise inen hierro cia adis pretrigger function primary and secondary boxes processing and operation program charinel 2 icis ccce ttc tees program chantiels ente tete pulse interval 7 pulse resolutlon ct ecrire recta nen R range calibration eene eene nnne rate of change interval eene rate of change lower limit alarm rate of change upper limit alarm rated power supply voltage OC Stal cists ane jc e receive data control receiver seltihgs ia conecte ttn a oet oen cbr IGCIDIOTD E en rrr REEL EO EXER ERE EDECUE EORR Da recorder structure eese eene eene nnne tnnt recording channel settings eeseeeseee recording channels recording operation eeeeeeeee nennen nnne recording operation settings seeeseeneeee recording start operation reference junction compensation reflash function reflash setting nont nes relational
22. 0 0595 of rd 0 3 C o o JPt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C groa 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C Ure Ni100 SAMA 200 0 to 250 0 C Ni100 DIN 60 0 to 180 0 C 0 0595 of rd 0 3 C EN o o o Ni1202 70 0 to 200 0 C HU g 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE4 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N 200 0 to 300 0 C 419 49 of rdg 2 7 Cu10 WEED 300 0 to 300 0 C 0 1 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 19C Cu10 BAILEY4 200 0 to 300 0 C J263B 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 3K 0 1 of rdg 1 5K 0 1K Culdat20 C 590 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00392 0 1 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 1 C ale Cui0at20 C 200 919 300 0 C Measurement alpha 0 00393 current 1 mA Cu25 at 0 C o 9 e A 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 0 1 C alpha 0 00425 BORN 0 2 of rdg 2 CUSA ALO 50 0 to 150 0 C alp na 50 0042609 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cut00 at 0 C 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 4 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C 0 1 C Cu10 GE high resolution 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N 200 0 to 300 0 C high resolution 0 1 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 1 C Qu10 WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C high resolution i i Cu10 BAILEY E high resolution 200 0 to 300 0 C Pt100 GOST 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1
23. 2 Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Setting the MATH Operation Turn ON the MATH channels to be used in the Action list Entering Expressions Enter an expression in the Formula box For information about expressions see section 1 13 MATH Functions M1 Option Setting the MATH Span 1 Enter the lower or upper limit of the MATH span in the Lower or Upper box under Span 2 Select the decimal place from the D P list under Span 3 Enterthe scale conversion value in the Unit box Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt MATH Channel Setting A001 A010 v pee eS aa ee d i ics 3 18 IM MW100 01E 3 6 MATH Settings MATH Channel Settings and the M1 Option Setting MATH Constants 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt MATH Constant Setting 2 Select the constant group you wish to set from the Constant List list Entering Math Constants Enter a constant in the Constant List list Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt MATH Constant Setting No Constant Value 000 O i 1 Alaa Sls als volts mis Ez z amp zI pe 3 Es a m E za S m 06 iil Zs E Apply Setting MATH Groups
24. Explanation of Functions or chapter 5 Specifications For information on the scale value of the measuring range see section 3 12 Scale Value Settings Setting the Input Range 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt Al DI Channel Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Setting the Input Mode Select the input type from the Mode list Setting the Measuring Range Select the measurement range from the Range list Setting the Measurement Span Determines the actual measuring range from the measurable range Enter the lower and upper limit of Span in the Lower or Upper boxes under Span Setting the Scale Set this item when linearly scaling the measured values 1 Select SCALE in the Calc list 2 Enterthe lower or upper limit of scale in the Lower or Upper box under Scale 3 Select the decimal place from the D P list under Scale 4 Enter the scale conversion value in the Unit box Differential Input Settings 1 Select DELTA in the Computation box 2 Enter the reference channel number in the Reference box Remote RJC RRJC Reference Channel Setting Enter the remote RJC reference channel number in the Ref Ch box This is required when RRJC is selected for the input type Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt AI DI Channel Setting Channel List 001 010 v No Mode Range Span Cale Ref Scale Unit Lower Uppe
25. Grouptt 3 e Tg Tii E croup Group02 1 3 e Te Tu T 100 msec Q amp Q Id lll lt n EJ e 100 msec amp amp M Ill lif EH o 2 21 08 10 Time h m s 1B 2838 TB IM MW100 01E 3 37 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Explanation of Display Items This is an explanation of the icons and measured data display items used in the monitor Screen Record Start Stop Computation Start Stop Used to start and stop data acquisition The icons of all functions are shown in the figure for the sake of explanation but normally buttons are dimmed when disabled Operation Icons Computation start stop button Starts and stops computation M1 Option Recording Start Stop button Starts and stops data acquisition Pause button Pauses monitor display updating Data acquisition does not stop Alarm ACK button Clears an alarm status hold Output channel operation icons When output modules installed Area for displaying manual DO and operation icons for arbitrary output Displays one channel s worth Operational status Illuminates during alarms recording and computation gt E Math Start Math Stop MathReset Math Clear Rec Start Rec Stop Q Message 9 Output Channel 4 31 gt Alarm Ack w ON OFF TimerReset Transmit Start Timer reset button Resets the timer Message button Select
26. SMTP client log Outputs the mail transmission log DHCP log Outputs the DHCP log HTTP log Outputs the HTTP log Modbus client log Outputs the Modbus client log Modbus client command Outputs the Modbus client status Modbus client connection status Outputs the Modbus client connection status Modbus master log Outputs the Modbus master log Modbus master command Outputs the Modbus client status Modbus master connection status Outputs the Modbus master connection status Status Status byte information User information User settings Relay information Relay action information System information Outputs the module recognition status Analog output information Outputs the analog output value information Initial balancing information Outputs initial balance information for the strain input module Common to Modbus Master Function and Modbus Slave Function Communication possible with Modbus RTU protocol Communication media RS 232 RS 422A 485 Control method No flow control None only Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length 8 bit fixed Parity Select Odd Even or None Stop bit Select either 1 or 2 bits Transmission mode RTU remote terminal unit mode only Slave address 1 to 247 IM MW100 01E 5 11 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Modbus Master Function M1 option Communication interval The interval for data loading from other
27. 600 Hz and its integer multiples 16 67 ms 60 Hz and its integer multi 500 ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 6 or 20 ms 1s 36 67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples 2s 100 ms 10 Hz and its integer multiples 5 10 20 30 60s 200 ms Low pass filter with Fc 5 Hz Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature meas urements using thermocouples If this happens make the measurement interval longer or use the 4 CH High Speed Univer sal Input Module 2 28 IM MW100 01E 2 10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Measurement Integration Rejected Frequencies and Notes Interval Time 100 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples 16 67 ms 60 Hz and its integer multiples 200ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 67 or 20 ms 500 ms 36 67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples 1s 100 ms 10 Hz and its integer multiples 0 20 80 60 200 ms Low pass filter with Fc 5 Hz When the measurement interval is 100 ms measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency noise is not rejected In such cases set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more Ho
28. Attempted to read MATH registers from an instrument without the MATH function option However there is no response in the following cases CRC Error Errors other than in above table 5 14 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Modbus Client Function M1 option Communication possible with Modbus TCP protocol Communication media Communication interval Connection wait time Ethernet 10Base T You can select the following 100 200 250 or 500 ms or 1 2 5 or 10s Depending on the performance of the main unit data reading and writing may not be able to be performed at the set communication interval resulting in data loss If this occurs the communication input channel holds the previous value In this case you must lengthen the communication interval or reduce the load on the main unit The connection can be dropped if there is no response from the server after sending commands You can select the connection wait time from the following Forever do not drop connection 0 to 10 s Communication recovery wait The time after which commands are sent following disconnection after the connection wait time Selected from the following Soon communication interval 1 60 s Connection destination server Up to 10 can be set Supported function Command settings Command items Modbus Server Function Same as Modbus master function Up to 100 commands can be set Loading channels C
29. CHOCOLATE ORANGE YELLOW ore recreen Jime CREEN cyan reaL LIGHTBLUE BLUE DARKBLUE Jevioter vior Macenta Pure maroon Apply IM MW100 01E 3 43 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Other Settings 1 Fromthe top screen click Display Setting Other Settings 2 Select whether to display channel numbers or tag names in the Channel No Tag Display list 3 Click the Apply button Top gt Display Setting gt Other Settings Channel No Tag Display CHANNEL Apply Setting Mode Meas Mode Log Information You can display information from the data acquisition log alarm summaries and other sources For information about display contents see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Log Information 1 From the top screen click System Setting gt Log Information 2 Select the type of log you wish to display in the Log Information list Enter the number of lines to display in the box to the right of the list 3 Click the Update button The updated time is displayed in the display box aligned with the Log Information list and the updated time current log information is displayed in the log display area Top gt System Setting gt Log Information Log Information RECORD zj j2 05 06 01 21 55 12 05 06 01 20 31 10 Power on 05 06 01 21 11 50 Create DATAO002 Log output 05 06 01 21 11 47 Record start 1 1 05 06 01
30. CONFIG Folder for storing the setting value file DATA DATAnnnn storage folder The folder management file MWFOLDER INF is created in the DATA folder The file contains the latest folder numbers and should not be deleted If a DATA folder is deleted a new folder is created starting with DATAOOOO DATAnnnn Folder for storing measured values computed values thinned values data acquisition logs and alarm summaries nnnn is automatically generated from 0000 to 9999 Recording of Measured Computed Values Measured and computed values can be saved by measurement group to the CF card Supported external media CF card Type II x 1 slot Type can be used Max card size 2 GB IM MW100 01E 5 5 uoneoyioedg B 5 2 Main Module Specifications Record start stop Recording operation Measurement groups Write mode Triggers Pretrigger function Recording channels Recording interval File size File name Starts and stops recording to CF card per the START and STOP keys Event Action function or communication commands Separate files created for each measurement group and measured and computed data is saved to CF card For each measurement group you can select whether or not to perform the save operation Measurement channels can be divided into up to 3 groups by module The measurement interval must be the same for all channels in the group Single Full Stop Rotate You can set the recording stop oper
31. Check the hub s power supply If it still does not work 1 3 There is a problem in the connection between Replace the hub and check the hub s operation the hub and the MW100 The ACT LED does not turn ON Check whether the PC can connect to the network 1 3 There is a problem with the PC Replace the PC s NIC There is a problem in the network configuration Check that the IP address subnet mask and default The settings are not correct gateway settings on the MW100 are correct There is a problem in the network configuration Turn OFF the power to the PC and the MW100 and E The setting changes have not taken effect carry out reconnection The PC and the MW100 are not in the same Connect the PC and the MW100 in the same network segment segment If the PC and the MW100 are connected as shown in the following figure the Search button cannot be used to detect the MW100 You can make the connection by manually specifying the IP address of the MW100 MW Network A 4 Router Network B The firewall is enabled when using Windows XP Disable the function See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW100 01E 4 9 eoueuejure y pue Punoouse qno4j 4 3 Troubleshooting The MW100 can be detected using the Search button but browser connection fails Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section The IP address is set to the defau
32. DC voltage thermocouple 3 wire RTD DI contact LEVEL Number of inputs 4 Input method Floating unbalanced input insulation between channels A D resolution Measuring range and accuracy 16 bits 20000 6000 The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions Ambient temp 2342 C ambient humidity 55 1096 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC power frequency 50 60 Hz 1 warm up time at least 30 minutes without adverse conditions such as vibrations Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms Nestea Accuracy Resolution Type Range or More ntegration Time 1 67 ms 1 Digit 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV _ 0 05 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 25digits 1 pV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV__ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV_ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV DC voltage 2 V 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 0 05 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 10digits 100 pV 6v 6 000 to 6 000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 1mV 20V 20 000 to 20 000 V__ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 1mV 100 V 100 00 to 100 00 V 0 0594 of rdg 2 digits 10 mV 60mV high res 0 000 to 60 000 mV 0 05 of rdg 20 digits 0 1 of rdg 100 digits 1uV 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V 0 059 6 of rdg 2 digits 0 1 of rdg 10 digits 100uV 6V high res 0 00
33. DIN rail mount bracket To prevent slacks in the DIN rail fix at least three locations of the DIN rail Dimensions when mounted on a DIN rail a Unit mm DIN rail 455 1 main module for connecting six input output modules 158 6 par 105 i ee d 9 IM MW100 01E 2 3 2 3 Attaching the Modules To prevent electric shock and instrument breakdown do not connect the power supply to the main module when attaching modules Preparing the Base Plate The accessory brackets are attached in order to attach the MW100 main module to the base plate Remove the base block blacket Attach the bracket that came with the MW100 Attachment Procedure 1 Check that the power supply is not connected to the main module 2 Align the connector on the rear panel of the module to the connector at the desired position of the base plate and insert the connector When the connectors are correctly connected the guide pin on the rear panel of the module is inserted into the guide hole on the base plate In addition the module is secured to the base plate with the latch lever locking in place at the bottom section of the base plate 3 Fasten with two screws M3 at the top of the main module and one screw at the top of the input output modules The main module can only be attached to the right
34. Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Output Range Settings Analog Output You can set the output type action range span preset value and reference channel Output Types In the Mode box select AO to output or SKIP to not output Output Action Setting Select TRANS transmission output or COM arbitrary output in the Action box Output Range Settings Select 10 V voltage output or 20 mA current output in the Range box Span Setting Select the actual output range from the allowed output range Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span Also enter the upper limit value in the Upper box Preset Value In the Preset Value box enter a preset value for the output operation when turning on the power or when an error occurs When a preset value is selected in the output operation settings the specified value is output Reference Channel Settings Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Reference Channel box This is set if TRANS is selected for the output action Top gt Channel Setting gt AO PWM Channel Setting o 4o fTRANs zl fov zi 10000 o0 foor EE A oue po m o s rewssifhwv sipwoo foco poo f ao s reawss wv loo foco Jpn m Jao s mewssi zwmaAsifooo ooo if foo ws o s rewssi zwmaAs fooo ooo M pooo fw so z cow zov szi 1000 100
35. Send data A RDB Received Data B Received data B RDA Received Data A Received data A Connection Procedure Cables Used There are two types of cable a 4 wire and 2 wire cable Choose a cable depending on the following conditions Cable Used Twisted pair shielded cable 3 x 24 AWG or more 4 wire 2 x 24 AWG or more 2 wire Characteristic impedance 100 Q Capacitance 50 pF m Cable length Max 1 2 km The transmission distance of the RS 422A 485 interface is not the direct distance but rather the total cable length shielded twisted pair To prevent electric shock confirm that the power supply is turned OFF before making connections Connections with Upstream Devices The following figure shows a connection with an upstream device If the upstream devices use an RS 232 port connect through a converter Host computer or connected upstream instrument Connected Main unit upstream RS 422A 485 instrument terminals RS 422A 485 Host computer Connected upstream instrument Main unit lt 3 RS 422A 485 terminals Converter RS 232 RS 422A 485 2 22 IM MW100 01E 2 7 Connecting the RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option Example of a Connection with an Upstream Device You can connect the MW100 to an upstream device with an RS 232 RS 422A or RS485 connection port For
36. Winter On the month week weekday and hour set as Winter time the time on the internal clock is moved one hour behind Unlike the internal clock which is changed on the main unit the dates of the measured and computed values are not adjusted Tags can be added to measured values that are recorded and saved You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all channels Can be set channel by channel Up to 15 5 20 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Log Information Data acquisition logs When recording is stopped data acquisition logs saved on the main unit are all saved to the CF card Maximum no of saved logs 1021 if this number exceeded old files are overwritten by new ones File name RECORDLG TXT Save location During recording in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card When recording stopped on the root folder of the CF card Alarm summaries When recording is stopped alarm summaries saved on the main unit are all saved to the CF card Maximum no of saved summaries 256 if this number exceeded old files are overwritten by new ones File name ALARMLG TXT Save location During recording in the DATAnnnn folder on the CF card Communication related log information can be saved in the main unit Communication log FTP client operation log e mail operation log DHCP operation log These can only be referenced through communication output and when the power is cut they are initia
37. lintegration Units Notation Explanation No time scale OFF data Every second SEC data Number of times of computing per second Every minute MIN X data Number of times of computing per minute Every hour HOUR data Number of times of computing per hour Integration of data every MATH integral number of times IM MW100 01E 1 49 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B Chapter 2 2 1 Installation and Wiring Handling Precautions This section describes the precautions to be taken when using the MW100 Please read before using this product f you are using this instrument for the first time make sure to thoroughly read the safety precautions given on pages ii and iii Do not remove the case For internal inspection or adjustment contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Do not place objects on top of the instrument Never place other instruments or objects containing water on top of the instrument Doing so can lead to malfunction Take proper care when carrying the instrument First turn off the DUT and the MW100 and remove all cables including measurement wires and communication cables Then remove the power cord from the outlet To prevent internal overheating do not obstruct the vent holes of the modules This instrument uses many plastic parts When cleaning wipe using a dry soft cloth Do not use volatile chemicals since this might cause discoloring and deformation Doing so ca
38. more 500 VDC AC power Between AC power supply terminal and earth terminal 1500 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute DC power Between DC power supply terminal and earth terminal 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute Approx 105 W x 131 H x 137 D mm Approx 1kg SERIAL COMM ZOVA MAX 50 60Hz Units mm Ic V i ANS RECORD MATH er ae SERIALRD L 72345978 i EHHHHHHHH A H e 100 240V AC EHHHHHHHH eea OOHHHHHHH FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA LILILILILILI OM FEL S E MEASURE ALARM Mwiood RECORD MATH hi SERIAL RD f _9 i 1 12345678 HHHHHHHHH 10BASE T POWER Ga H AAT 1228vD6 I HHHHHHARH A LJ A e eC Jell e LI SERIAL COMM vA WAX E
39. nai RD eene 1 4 Input Output Modles 3 citet tecti iet tar ire a a et tte ead 1 4 Base Platen m 1 6 PG SOfllWare occa esed a iaar aeee tuse rr dta d ase eoe d de ete wh hoes 1 7 MW100 Operation Guide is sisinio ieie aeir eieiei rennen nens 1 8 Functions of the Main Module eese entente 1 9 Names and Functions of Parts emere nene 1 9 Switches and Keys exe REI eu ORE e idet Pet eee tenis tra etant es 1 10 COnHectoISt serons cu n dt au us D e AE M Miis 1 10 DISPlAYS EHCTIE ete 1 11 Measurement zio DI dI uhi 1 12 IIR IRT UE 1 12 IJI EPIIT 1 12 Mathis n SIRE Ua RE A e aA 1 12 MATH UM Option oinen itat eren ett recette that e e e cederet ite be tbe bent 1 12 Remote RIC RRUG erison ere e inde itte evel evils ek Y E d eu da 1 13 BUEnOUt ok ee cuf ge soe t c Ro Eta e da ph Es 1 13 Alaris m M 1 13 Operation Modes and Statuses 0 ecceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeseeseeeseeeeeeeseaeeseeeaas 1 14 Tag Strings EE e eee DA e ei T De ERE et 1 15 Communication Specifications eese nennen nennen 1 15 Saving Data tothe CF Gard uite Rind pane 1 17 Daylight saving time deett teme pega revente ve ee idera tees 1 18 TIGE e iioii nti cavalo uper E DEUL EIL IDI DO E eid it Sct aking 1 18 Match Time ei nete te E iuete le E A 1 18 Event Action EURDctlom iei et
40. power failed TIME 19 56 40 J Date time power restored 1 22 IM MW100 01E 1 4 Functions of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module This module allows up to four inputs of DC voltage thermocouple 3 wire RTD or digital input DI at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Measurement Input Types Measuring Range Measurement Input Type Notation Do not measure SKIP DC voltage VOLT Thermocouple TC Resistance temperature detector RTD DI DI Remote RJC RRJC DC Voltage Measuring Range Notation Rated Measurement Range 20 mV 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV 60 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV 2V 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 6V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 V 20 000 to 20 000 V 100 V 100 V 100 00 to 100 00 V 60 mV high resolution 60 mVH 0 000 to 60 000 mV 1V 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V 6 V high resolution 6 VH 0 0000 to 6 0000 V Thermocouple Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Type R R 0 0 to 1760 0 C Type S S 0 0 to 1760 0 C Type B B 0 0 to 1820 0 C Type K K 200 0 to 1370 0 C Type E E 200 0 to 800 0 C Type J J 200 0 to 1100 0 C Type T T 200 0 to 400 0 C Type N N 0 0 to 1300 0 C Type W Ww 0 0 to 2315 0 C Type L L 200 0 to 900 0 C IM MW100 01E 1 23 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3
41. 0 C Except 0 to 200 C 2 5 C Except 0 to 200 C 12 C more than 2000 C more than 2000 C 0 05 of rdg 4 C 0 1 of rdg 11 C 0 1 C 0 05 of rdg 2 C 0 1 of rdg 8 5 C W WRe26 0 0 to 2400 0 C Except 100 to 300 C 4 C Except 100 to 300 C 12 C less than 100 C not guaranteed __ less than 100 C not guaranteed Type N AWG14 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 3 5 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C 0 1 of rdg 2 5 C TXK GOST 200 0 to 600 0 C Except 200 to 0 C Except 200 to 0 C 0 2 of rdg 0 7 C 1 of rdg 2 5 C 1 R S B K E J T ANSI IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 4 W W 5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co IM MW100 01E 5 29 uoneoayioedg 5 5 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms iE ere Resolution Type Range or More ntegration Time 1 67 ms 1 Digit Ft100 200 0 to 600 0 C__1 9 95 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C JPt1007 200 0 to 550 1000 ee fw prise Pt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C 5 959 ot rdg 0 3 C 9 o 0 01 C JPt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C Bone 101 0f rdg 1 5 C Ni100 SAMA 200 0 to 2
42. 0 0 to 2400 0 C Except 0 to 200 C 2 5 C Except 0 to 200 C 12 C ra more than 2000 C more than 2000 C 0 05 of rdg 4 C 0 1 of rdg 11 C 0 05 of rdg 2 C 0 1 of rdg 8 5 C W WRe26 0 0 to 2400 0 C Except 100 to 300 C 4 C Except 100 to 300 C 12 C less than 100 C not guaranteed less than 100 C not guaranteed Type N AWG14 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 3 5 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C 0 1 of rdg 2 5 C TXK GOST 200 0 to 600 0 C Except 200 to 0 C Except 200 to 0 C 0 2 of rdg 0 7 C 1 of rdg 2 5 C 1 R S B K E J T ANSI IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 JIS C 1602 1981 2 L Fe CuNi DIN43710 U Cu CuNi DIN 43710 3 N Nicrosil Nisil IEC 584 DIN IEC 584 4 W We5 RE W 26 Re Hoskins Mfg Co IM MW100 01E 5 25 uoneoyioedg 5 4 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms ic webs Resolution Type Range or More ntegration Time 1 67 ms 1 digit Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 95 of o 0 1 of rd 1 5 C 0 1 C JPt100 200 0 to 550000 005 9f rdg O90 E SE Pt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C of o o o 0 01 C RTD JPU100 high res F 00 to 120 00 0 0976 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of r
43. 2 Poe e o T From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt Modbus Client Setting 1 Select the Enable check box under Client Function After clicking the Apply button the settings are enabled and communication begins Clear the Enable check box and click the Apply button to stop communications Select a communication interval from the Cycle list under Communication If you select the Close check box and there is no response from the server communication is closed after the time entered in Connection Timeout elapses Enter the time until communication is closed in the Connection Timeout to box under Connection Enter the time until communications are recovered in the Wait Time box under Recovery Action Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt Modbus Client Setting 1 Apply Modbus Client Setting 2 a OI H o From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt Modbus Client Setting 2 The server list is displayed Enter the server name in the Server box Enter the server port number in the Port box Enter the server unit number in the Unit No box Click the Apply button gt Communication Setting gt Modbus Client Setting 2 1 nw 00 1 daqmaster com S ix TS a a f 92 168 1 201 TS a a S R TS a a z E R m a a S c 2 RS m m eo TIT 3 Dx m m III TT a 3 Dx TS
44. 2 4 V Threshold level accuracy 0 1 V Contact input ON for 100 or less OFF for 10 kQ or more 1 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 2 SAMA DIN 3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE 84 4 to 170 0 C Cu10 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Cu10 WEED 20 0 to 250 0 C Cu10 BAILEY 20 0 to 250 0 C 5 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10 uA at 200 mV range Threshold level is approximately 0 1 V Measurement interval integration time and filter Burnout Measurement Integration Detection Filter Rejected Noise and Notes Interval Time Cycle 1 ue 1 67 ms 1s 600 Hz and its integer multiples 200 ms 16 67 ms Rectangular So z ane is teger res 500 ms SUE z and its integer multiples Auto Measurement Automatically detects the power supply frequency andset uto interval 16 67 or 20 ms 1s 36 67 ms Trapezoidal 50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples 2s 100 ms Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples 5s 200 ms Cos Fc 5 Hz low pass filter 10 20 30 60 s 200 ms j When the measurement interval is 100 ms burnout is detected in one channel per measurement interval Therefore if measurement is started in a burnout condition or after a burnout occurs burnout cannot be detected for up to 10 measurements approximate
45. 31 Handling Precautions of the CF Card sssseseeeeeeeenenn nennen 2 31 Inserting the CF Card oap tede epu tcp cde cente ne id ei 2 31 Ejecting the GF Cardi eie ceu eie bct etd 2 31 Chapter 3 Setting and Data Acquisition 3 1 Gornnection Environmerit 2 5 220 d Dto mei bee aat ove 3 1 PG System Requirements Lm e trim p tete teda Rte 3 1 BioWSOt iin nn AURI 3 1 Installing Java uie tenet eise i le celia 3 1 MW100 Operation Screens sssssssssseeesseeene nennen nennen tnnt nns 3 1 Switching Modes Se Set a pedes ub quoe beiden 3 3 3 2 Connection to the MW100 kyris aineeseen nene nennen nennen nennen nennen 3 4 Ethernet Connection sisir rcc td aerem recorre sae v Ded Hc a EE ese eee 3 4 Connecting with Serial Communication Optional eee 3 5 Modb s Settings td E Ra D aee ntt Lb dioe ele 3 6 Login Function and User Settings ssssseeeeeeeneneneen eene 3 8 3 3 System Settings eet ud E eb eg eode 3 9 System Reconstruction oe e Lee cc REIR EERB ce estet be gir Mand adiu ko Ra eran Sa dale 3 9 Setting the Date and Time sse enne entrent nnne nene 3 9 Formatting the CF Card Checking the Free Space and System Information and Initialization 3 10 Daylight saving Time Setting ssesesesseeeeseeeeeeenneennnen nennen 3 10 Other Settings ue eueh dE eau RH DeeS 3 11 Status Information and Processing
46. 5 9 WSS reo TEE 2 3 D 5 e crac tert 5 9 DHCP client function icii aaia 1 15 D 1 30 1 35 differential computation between channels 1 12 differential input settings sseeeee 3 16 differential lower limit alarm seseeeseeeeese 1 13 differential upper limit alarm DIN Walil ecis M 2 3 CIP SWUUGCH e H 1 10 2 21 direct data length ssssssseseseeeennee 3 14 display 1 11 3 1 5 9 display Colors zitieren tr eerie pert tiri 3 42 display groups settings eseeene 3 43 display scale settings seeseeeeene 3 42 display setting 3 3 DNS iniisa 5 9 DNS client settings 3 32 dual SChOCM isis seuasscdesystectastbesasitheczatsacdsaaneceniaee 3 37 IM MW100 01E Index 1 un IJ Index E E mail format E mail function E mail retransmission cccccscceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteee 1 22 ENERG eana uia r na eee 3 22 energize 1 42 energize setting 9 22 entering expressions sss 3 18 error display cunin ete deed 3 12 4 1 4 8 errors pon start p 5 Athi ia en ten eee 4 1 ethernet cable ethernet communication ssseseeenee 1 15 ethernet port ss
47. 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions eoueuejure y pue Punoouse qno4j Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E040 Invalid client type Enter a correct client type E041 Invalid server type Enter a correct server type E050 Invalid input type Enter an input type that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number E051 Module of an invalid input type found in the Enter an input type that can be selected for all modules range of specified channels specified by the channel range E052 Invalid measuring range Enter a measuring range that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number E053 Module of an invalid measuring range found in Enter a measuring range that can be selected for all modules the range of specified channels specified by the channel range E054 Upper and lower limits of span cannot be equal Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of span E055 Upper and lower limits of scale cannot be equal Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of scale E056 Invalid reference channel number Set channels other than the input module s own channel E060 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel Set a type for the channel number setting other than SKIP E061 Cannot set an alarm for a channel on which Set the Use Do not Use setting for expressions on the MATH function is
48. B 1 4 Functions of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Thermocouple cont Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Type U U 200 0 to 400 0 C KPvsAu7Fe KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K PLATINEL PLATINEL 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR40 20 PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C NiNiMo NiNiMo 0 0 to 1310 0 C WRe3 25 WRe3 25 0 0 to 2400 0 C W WRe26 WWRe26 0 0 to 2400 0 C Type N AWG14 N14 0 0 to 1300 0 C TXK GOST XK 200 0 to 600 0 C Resistance Temperature Detector 1 mA Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt100 Pt100 1 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 JPt100 1 200 0 to 550 0 C Pt100 high resolution Pt100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C JPt100 high resolution JPt100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C Ni100 SAMA Ni100SAMA 200 0 to 250 0 C Ni100 DIN Ni100DIN 60 0 to 180 0 C Ni120 Ni120 70 0 to 200 0 C Pt100 high noise resistance Pt100 1R 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 high noise resistance JPt100 1R 200 0 to 550 0 C Pt100 GOST Pt100G 200 0 to 600 0 C Resistance Temperature Detector 2 mA Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt100 Pt100 2 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 JPt100 2 200 0 to 250 0 C Pt100 high resolution Pt100 2H 140 00 to 150 00 C JPt100 high resolution JPt100 2H 140 00 to 150 00 C Pt50 Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE Cu10GE 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu1
49. Cause Corrective Action Ref section b where The dip switch settings Turn OFF the power remove the CF card turn ON all dip 1 3 is any character are not correct switches and power up again If the situation does not change other than F servicing is required bF The dip switch settings Powering up in setup reset mode Turn OFF the power turn ON 1 3 are not correct all dip switches and power up again Since all settings such as the IP address are initialized reconfiguration is necessary System Errors The left and right digits of the 7 segment LED display F and an error code respectively The LED illuminates Display Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section FO System ROM error Servicing required F1 SRAM error Servicing required F2 EEPROM error Servicing required x F3 Error in the internal battery Servicing required of the main module However this error is also displayed immediately after the battery is replaced If this happens power cycle the MW100 F4 Ethernet controller error Servicing required F6 Web file load error Servicing required FF Error in writing unit information Servicing required Module Errors The left and right digits of the 7 segment LED display are U and an error code respectively The LED illuminates In the case of module errors the error number and the corresponding module number are displayed alternately as shown in the figure
50. Color 0 oor RED gt ooa CHOCOLATE v 0 ORANGE e os Yeow sj be owe sz oe fume z 09 cREEN sj 010 CYAN ii Color 0000 00 etack p rown CHOCOLATE ORANGE YELLOW forve rcREN jine GREEN CYAN teat LIGHTBLUE BLUE DARKBLUE Jevicter viorer mMacenra ure maroon Apply Display Scale Settings From the top screen click Display Setting gt Group Scale Setting Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Select LINEAR or LOG in the Scale list Select the number of divisions in the Div list It can only be selected when set to LINEAR display If you select AUTO the number of divisions is determined automatically from the scale or span of the specified channel 5 Select a display position of NORMAL or CENTER in the Bar Graph Type list The numerical or bar graph display is updated accordingly 6 Specify a percentage from the top or bottom in the Zone boxes Enter a Lower value of 0 to 95 95 and an upper value from 5 to 100 9 7 Click the Apply button oO Ni Top gt Display Setting gt Graph Scale Setting S Zones i a H ey 02 LINEAR z aoro s NORMAL 0 o3 fUNEAR e auro s NORMAL 0 04 LINEAR S JAUTO zi Norma JO inean zl aoro zi Norma o amp inean z faro z Norma os tos zija zinoma mo os JAUTO NORMAL o Apply iii
51. Cover Characters indicating the terminal function and a terminal symbol indicating the type of signal to be input output to each terminal are written on the back of the terminal cover of each I O module For information on wiring of corresponding terminal signals see the wiring procedures in this section The 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Module NDI does not have a terminal cover 4 CH High Speed 10 CH Medium Speed 6 CH Medium Speed 4 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Universal Input Module 4 wire RTD Resistance Strain Input Module Input Module B12 B35 Terminal cover WAT ch To CH TAVAK ch To GH BOVeMAXTO CATI SXVeMAXTO amp CATII Terminal Channel EN 73 Ap eH symbol number E Aa within Wi module E203 i2 CHI E ES 1 ag E CH4 E H2 E E 10 CH High Speed 8 CH Medium Speed 8 CH Medium Speed 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Input Module Analog Output Module PWM Output Module Digital Output Module D05 D24 Attaching and Removing the Terminal Block The I O terminals can be removed as shown in the figure below Also when the terminal cover is flipped up 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module The terminal block can be attached and detached you can remove it by forcing it back 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module B12 B35 Pull out handle The terminal plate can be attached and detached Attachmen
52. Hold Operation sssseneeeenenenn 1 42 Relay Opetationis ion as cde vet cet et etta cd e d eee ene nd 1 43 Reflash Futictiori zaiuo aie Re Re eee ei EHI RERER 1 43 IM MW100 01E xi Contents 4 13 MATE Function MI Option 1 1 or de ether RR unt ne 1 44 Overview of the MATH Function ssssesesseeeeeeneeeeenenenene nennen nnne nnne nnns 1 44 Number of MATE Ghannels cto ePi HERR Ren 1 44 MATH Type EP ack ideal ade ace a ala eee Aci 1 44 MATH Reference Channels ccccccsceeeseeeseeseaeeeeeeseaeeeeceeeaeecaaeseaeesaeeeeaeeeaeseseeeneeeeaees 1 46 Computation Operation esssesssseeeseeeseene enne nennen nnne nennen rennen nnns 1 47 Mathi Intervali cissie aape te dete eoi e cile cer aped t 1 48 Math Spar iun tot ee deca de de edel dis heme 1 48 Handling Units in Computations ssssssssssssseeeeeteeneenenenneeneneennnn 1 48 TLOG PSUM Settings eene eee ee ene 1 48 Alarm Level eee eem c p eee ne A ve ERR R ILES 1 48 Math Error Data Processing 5 1 eite petenti E TAE EEEn iiS 1 49 Chapter2 Installation and Wiring 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 Handling Precautions ettet a eR re vec err ka oin tere 2 1 lnstall tlori uenit ee Ee eie nme 2 2 Installation Location 2 tee inei p ege e e Pr gegen P reb 2 2 Iristallatiori Procedures 2 reete PREPARAR 2 2 Attaching the Modules oct eie
53. MXD M Month file created local time 1 9 X October Y November Z December DD Date when file created local time 1 31 I Files in measurement groups 1 to 3 are 1 to3 Computed data file is M Thinned values T XXXX Sequence number 0000 9999 MXD MW100 file extension uppercase 5 6 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Data length Measurement groups for which TRIGGER was selected can be set individually For the measurement groups on which Direct mode was selected all groups have the same length Trigger Type Selectable data length Target Direct 30 min All groups 1 2 3 4 6 8 or 12 hours 1 2 3 5 7 10 14 or 31 days Trigger 10 20 or 30 min Individual groups 1 2 8 4 6 8 or 12 hours 1 2 3 5 7 10 14 or 31 days File size calculation File size bytes header size data size Header size bytes 904 no of recording channels x 232 Measurement data size bytes no of recording measurement channels x 4 x no of samples Math data size bytes no of recording math channels x 6 x no of samples No of samples Save interval s measurement interval s Ex Measurement interval 100 ms no of measurement channels 24 save interval 10 min Header size 904 bytes 24 x 232 bytes 6472 bytes Data size 24 bytes x 600 s 0 1 s 576 000 bytes Guideline of the sample time for the different CF card sizes when one type of measurement
54. PWM Output PWM Output Method Output Method Notation Actions Transmit TRANS Outputs a duty pulse wave according to the measured or computed results of the input channel specified on the same unit You can also produce pattern output using the broken line input function Command output COM Outputs specified data based on the values sent from the PC Output Waveform Output width External power supply Duty Output width 499 9 voltage Pulse interval Pulse interval Pulse Interval 1 ms to 300 s can be set channel by channel Range Notation Setting Range 1 ms interval setting range 1 ms 1 ms to 30 000 s can be set in units of 1 ms 10 ms interval setting range 10 ms 10 ms to 300 00 s can be set in units of 10 ms The pulse interval can be set by determining the pulse interval coefficient The pulse interval coefficient is set from 1 to 30000 Pulse interval range x pulse interval coefficient Output Update Interval The output is updated at 100 ms minimum intervals It is not synchronized to the measurement interval Output Range 0 000 to 100 000 Operation upon Startup and Error Occurrence See section 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module IM MW100 01E 1 37 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module The following describes the ou
55. Q B35 are different On the strain module scaling corresponding to Displayed with 1 gauge method conversion 1 7 the gauge method is not set for 2 gauge and Set scaling appropriately depending on the gauge 4 gauge methods the amount of strain is doubled method or quadrupled On the strain module NDI a strain gauge type When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire 2 4 sensor without a remote sensing wire is being use the DV450 001 conversion cable used Alarms are not output Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section There is a problem in the alarm setting Both the alarm and output relay must be set 3 7 3 8 appropriately Make the alarm and output relay settings appropriate The CF card is not detected Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section There is a problem with the CF card Replace the CF card 2 11 Eject and format the CF card then insert it again IM MW100 01E 4 11 eoueueojure y pue BunooysajqnoiL 4 4 Calibration To maintain measuring accuracy we recommend calibration once per year Calibration of the instrument requires a calibration instrument of the necessary accuracy and resolution Please consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the instrument Range Calibration for DC Voltage RTD Resistance Strain and Analog Output Required Instruments DC Voltage Current Standard Must meet the following specifications M 9100 by FLUKE or equivalent Output range 20 mV
56. The following explains setting entry using a browser For information about communication commands see the Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E From the top page click Communication Setting Serial Communication Setting Receiver Settings 1 In the Function list select NORMAL general communications MODBUS M Modbus master or MODBUS S Modbus slave Modbus settings consist of master and slave settings 2 Enter an address number in the Address box Data Transfer Settings 1 Select a baud rate in the Baud Rate list Select a parity check method in the Parity Bit list Select a number of bits from the Stop Bit list Select a communication data length from the Data Length list Select a handshaking method in the Handshake list ce ov Click the Apply button Receiver Function NORMAL gt Address 01 Data Transfer Baud Rate 9600 gt bps Parity Bit EVEN gt Stop Bit li bit Data Length 8 Z bit Handshake orForF z Apply IM MW100 01E 3 5 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 2 Connection to the MW100 Modbus Settings Set when using the Modbus function For Modbus TCP set Modbus client settings 1 2 and 3 For Modbus RTU set Modbus master settings 1 and 2 and Receiver settings Modbus Master Setting 1 1 From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt Modbus Master Setting 1 2 Select the Enable check box under Master Function 3 Select a communication interval from the Cy
57. a Pa cet eh act wa ee ed 4 2 Execution Error ge IR eser tectis eec ec erbe heels 4 5 Exec tion Errots o e em e ER ea te coe Bat Po Weel eed 4 5 Communication Command Error cccccccescecccccsssecseeceeessaeeceecessseeeeeeceseseeeesescssseeeeeseese 4 6 Commu ricatior EFTOFL ecrit etie ete hag te T 4 7 System Errors Sieh eL e dat aine eva i eL eed 4 7 xiv IM MW100 01E Contents 4 2 Error Display in the Monitor Screen and Corrective Actions sesseesssss 4 8 4 3 Troubleshooting ia 2 neret ede et el tpi ep f aget 4 9 4 4 Calibrations s seb DERE EA 4 12 Range Calibration for DC Voltage RTD Resistance Strain and Analog Output 4 12 Calibration of Temperature Measurements using Thermocouples 4 16 4 5 Parts and Mairitenance ederet eee order im ER e EE De d esed ae raa eee rnnt 4 17 46 System InitialiZatiQn s oa ctc eta cid e deitate tes 4 18 Initialization Type ort eet e erg eee de on eere e ret eode e ts 4 18 Initialization Procedure crei pere boe E DERE 4 18 Chapter 5 Specification 5 1 Common Specifications rieren on dea e D tO dee Pe Peccata ee 5 1 5 2 Main Module Specifications isin assi niian aiaee ada a a nns 5 2 5 3 Base Plate Specifications ssir ia eens eiiean aeaea aan aoa a nennen neret 5 24 5 4 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Specifications ssessss 5 25 5 5 10 CH Medium S
58. a message with the UP DOWN buttons then click to write Messages are set in advance Computation reset clear button Resets clears computation M1 Option Output Channel Operation Icons Manual DO channel Channel number switching Click to switch the channel number Channel number switching Click to switch the Channel channel number number display Output Channel Output Channel 31 m OFF Output value Relay ON OFF button di isplay bar Click to turn relays ON and OFF Displays output values in a values Monitor Display Switching and Group Selection bar graph Also you can click to change the output Transmission output start stop button When output modules installed Collectively starts or stops output on output channels set for transmission output If both ON and OFF are mixed in the transmission output control settings the operation stops Arbitrary output channel Channel number display 21 D 50 000 Changes output value Click to change the output value Output value display Analog output V or mA display PWM Output 96 display Select a monitor display Select a monitor display type Meter Bar graph Numeric value Select the display group Select the display group you wish to display Select background color Switch background color between white and gray 3 38 IM MW100 01E 3 16 Measured Data M
59. and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Wiring the Power Supply Terminal Power Supply Cord Basic Specification Code 1W A e Furnish a switch double pole type to separate the unit from the main power supply in the power supply line Also include an ON OFF indicator with the Switch as well as a display that acts as a power supply shut down for the instrument Switch specifications Steady state current rating 3 A or more Inrush current rating 100 A or more Conforms with IEC60947 1 and 3 Connect a fuse of 2 A to 15 A to the power supply line Do not insert a switch or fuse on the ground line Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 240 VACrms Supply voltage range used AC power supply 90 to 250 VACrms Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable line frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy 1 Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF 2 Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover 3 Connect the power cord and the protective ground cord to the power supply terminals according to the figure below Use round crimp on lugs wit
60. at 20 C Cu10a393 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00393 Cu25 at 0 C Cu25 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00425 Cu53 at 0 C Cu53 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00426035 Cu100 at 0 C Cu100 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 x 1 4 Pt25 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE high resolution Cu10GEH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N high resolution Cu10LNH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED high resolution Cu10WEEDH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY high resolution Cu10BAILEYH 200 0 to 300 0 C Pt100 GOST Pt100G 200 0 to 600 0 C Cu100 GOST Cu100G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu50 GOST Cu50G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu10 GOST Cu10G 200 0 to 200 0 C IM MW100 01E 1 27 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 5 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module DI Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range LEVEL LEVEL Vth 2 4 V Contact input CONTACT 1 KQ or less ON 100 KQ or less OFF shunt capacitance 0 01 uF or less Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20s 30s 60 s The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval For details see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit If the measurement interval is 100 ms burnout detection is performed on one channel during one measurement interval After mea
61. below can be selected for the instrument Table of Handshaking Methods O indicates that it is supported Data Transmission Control Data Reception Control Control used to send data to a PC Control used to receive data from a PC Bui pue uonejesul s Handshaking method OFF OFF Software handshaking Hardware handshaking Stops transmission when X OFF is received Resume when X ON is received Stops transmission when CB CTS is false Resume when it is true Software handshaking Hardware handshaking No handshaking Send X OFF when the received data buffer is 3 4th filled Send X ON when the received data buffer becomes 1 4th filled Set CA RTS to False when the received data buffer is 3 4th filled Set to True when the received data buffer becomes 1 4th filled No handshaking XON XON XON RS CS RS OFF OFF Send Data Control Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer X OFF and X ON from the computer are treated as data and CS is ignored Receive Data Control Handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer When the receive buffer of the instrument becomes full data thereafter is discarded RS True fixed e IM MW100 01E 2 25 2 8 Connecting the RS 232 Interface C2 Option XON XON Send Data Control Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument a
62. by browser or DHCP before connecting To change the IP address follow steps 1 6 and 10 11 For changes by DHCP follow steps 1 3 and 7 11 1 Pawn From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt IP Address Setting Enter a host name in the Host Name box under DNS Information Enter a domain name in the Domain Name box under DNS Information Enter a fixed IP address in the IP Address box under IP Address Information Enter a subnet address in the Subnet Mask box under IP Address Information Enter a default gateway address in the Default Gateway box under IP Address Information To enable the DHCP client function select the DHCP Client Function check box 3 4 IM MW100 01E 3 2 Connection to the MW100 8 Toobtain DNS information from the server select the DNS Information check box 9 Toregister a host name on the server select the Host Name check box 10 Click the Apply button 11 Power cycle the MW100 The setting changes are applied Top gt Communication Setting gt IP Address Setting Host Name DNS Host Name mwi OOuser Domain Name Jleqmstercom IP Address Information IP Address s21681100 Subnet Mask 255 255 2540 Default Gateway s16911 DHCP Client Function I Enable DNS Information Iv Get from DHCP Server Host Name M Register to DNS Server Apply Connecting with Serial Communication Optional You can enter settings using a browser or with communication commands
63. channel Referenced input channel is illegal Operation upon errors input module removed Referenced input channel is set to Skip Referenced input channel is Invalid math error in Differential computation suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 Internal communication error Output value held occurs immediately after an internal communication error but there is a recovery action CPU abnormality Operation upon errors Command output Internal communication error Output value held occurs upon an internal communication error but there is a recovery action CPU abnormality Operation upon errors PWM output may not always reach 5 See Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality Output Operation after Recovery from an Abnormality by Output Setting Output Setting Abnormality Recovery Output Operation Transmission Referenced input module recovers Operation upon errors transmission output within units removed input modules are inserted output Referenced input channel changed from Skip to Measurement range Referenced input channel is restored from Invalid math error in Differential computation to normal Recover after internal communication If the error recovery time is 10 s or error more operation upon error operation upon power ON Transmission output If the error recovery time is within 10 S operation upon startup transmission output CPU abnor
64. computed values are saved to CF card Record start stop Executed simultaneously upon recording of the measured values and computed values No trigger functions are available Recording operation User can select Thinning record or Do not record Record mode Select a record stop action of Single Full stop or Rotate Thinning time Data saving is set for 1 per thinning time Set a thinning time of 4 5 10 20 or 30 sec 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 or 30 min or 1 hour However the thinning time cannot be set shorter than the measurement interval File name Generated automatically in sequence using the date and time cannot be specified by the user Data length Select 30 minutes or 1 2 3 4 6 8 or 12 hours or 1 2 3 5 7 10 14 or 31 days However it cannot be set so that the file size could exceed 10 MB Also the data length cannot be set shorter than the thinning time Recording channels Can be specified for each channel settings for recording of measured and computed values is set separately File size The file size equation is the same as that for the computed value files Writing message During execution of the recording action a message that corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file Five messages of up to 15 characters each are available for including in a single file up to 10 messages per file Operation upon failure recovery If a power failure occurs during recording the data up to the
65. data into expressions Flag Input Channels Can be set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0 Normally 0 but turns to 1 upon occurrence of certain events of the Event Action function For example given the expression NOTFO01 TLOG SUM 001 if the Event action s Edge action is set to FLAG F01 when the event occurs F01 becomes 1 and NOTFO01 becomes 0 therefore the total of channel 001 is 0 1 46 IM MW100 01E 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Program Channels Up to thirty two inputs of broken line data can be included in expressions Multiple points can be set for the time from the start point and the output value at that point Specified points are linked with a straight line the value of Y at the elapsed time X is output There is SINGLE in which one cycle is executed and REPEAT in which execution repeats By specifying a MATH channel to which broken line input is assigned to the reference channel of an analog output channel you can output arbitrary patterns Example Y Output 30 800 40 800 10 500 20 500 0 0 50 0 X Elapsed time s Entry Example Input of broken line data in the example is as follows 0 0 10 500 20 500 30 800 40 800 50 0 1 0 If there are fewer than thirty two setting points a 1 0 is required to show the end of the points Operation of program channels for the computation operation Computation Operation Program channel operation
66. difference in the measured values of channels 001 and 002 Multiplication 003 K01 Multiplies the measured data on channel 003 by constant K01 Division 004 K02 Divides the measured data on channel 004 by constant K02 Exponentiation 005 006 Raises the measured data of channel 005 to the power of the measured data of channel 006 Logical Operations Type Operator Example Explanation Logical product AND 001AND002 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 When channels 001 and 002 0 1 Logical sum OR 0010R002 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 1 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 1 When channels 001 and 002 0 1 Exclusive OR XOR 001XOR002 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 0 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 1 When channel 001 0 and channel 002 0 1 When channels 001 and 002 0 0 Logical negation NOT NOTO01 When channel 001 0 1 When channel 001 0 0 1 44 IM MW100 01E 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Relational Operations Type Operators Example Explanation Equal EQ 001 EQ 002 When channel 001 channel 002 1 When channel 001 channel 002 0 Not equal NE 002 NE 001 When channel 001 channel 002 1 When channel 001 channel 002 0 Greater than GT 003 GT K01 When channel 003 gt
67. displays active channels Auto Zone The waveform display area is divided up according to the number of displayed waveforms IM MW100 01E 3 39 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Numerical Display Displays measured data as numerical values When alarms are set the alarm status is displayed to the left of the numerical value Alarm status Alarm not Q Illuminated No alarm occurring Q Illuminated Alarm occurring set up Blinking Alarm hold clear wait symbol in circle is alarm type H L rH rL dH dL after alarm factor cleared Blinking Alarm hold clear wait after alarm factor occurrence Bar Graph Displays measured values in a bar graph When alarms are set the alarm status is displayed to the left of the bar graph For information on alarm statuses see Numerical Display in this section CH 001 CH 002 CH 003 CH 004 CH 005 a s 60 50 40 a 3 0 H E 3 Meters Displays measured values in a meter When alarms are set the alarm status is displayed to the left of the meter For information on alarm statuses see Numerical Display in this section CH 001 CH 002 CH 003 CH 004 CH 005 3 40 IM MW100 01E 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Setting Mode Display Settings Tag Settings Enter Tag names to assign to measurement and MATH channels From the top screen click Display Setting Channel Tag Setting Select the tag number group y
68. dui eec lett ee etes ae 2 4 Preparing the Base Plale ertet E etre n dere ates eie 2 4 Attachment Proced re noir e C inlaid eit 2 4 Attachment Positions and Channel Numbers eeeseseeeeeeeeenee 2 5 Connecting Signal Wires eet Lente eere ente desee a Tet 2 6 Terminal Arrangement Markings on the Terminal Cover seeeeeeeene 2 6 Attaching and Removing the Terminal Block s em 2 6 Attaching the Screw Terminal Plate essen 2 7 Screw Terminal BIOGR s i ire Re RE Mi EUR darin 2 7 General Precautions When Wiring the Input Output Signal Wires 2 8 Wiring Procedures 3 iet HR UCET 2 10 Wiring the Universal Input Module seeennm emen 2 10 Wiring the 4 Wire RTD Resistance Input Module e 2 11 Wiring the Strain Input Module ssssseeeeeeneneeennenneee nennen nennen nnne 2 11 Wiring Digital Input Modules 2 1t et e e cte eo obe tiet 2 14 Wiring with the Analog Output Module seeeeeeeenenenen nennen 2 15 Wiring with the PWM Output Module eeeeseeeenenenenenenneenen nennen 2 15 Wiring with the Digital Output Module sseseeeeenenenenenneennenenne 2 16 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF 2 17 Connections with the Power Cord Power Sup
69. format Enter an IP address using the correct format E020 Invalid channel number Enter the correct channel number E021 Invalid sequence of first and last channel Set a value for the last channel that is greater than the first channel E022 Invalid alarm number Enter the correct alarm number E023 Invalid relay number Enter a correct relay number E024 Invalid sequence of first and last relay Set a value for the last relay that is greater than the first relay E025 Invalid MATH group number Enter a correct MATH group number E026 Invalid box number Enter the correct box number E027 Invalid timer number Enter the correct timer number E028 Invalid match time number Enter the correct match time number E029 Invalid measurement group number Enter a correct measurement group number E030 Invalid module number Enter a correct module number E031 Invalid start and end time of DST Enter a correct start and end time E032 Invalid display group number Enter a correct display group number E033 Invalid tripline number Enter a correct tripline number E034 Invalid message number Enter a correct message number E035 Invalid user number Enter a correct user number E036 Invalid server type Enter a correct destination type E037 Invalid e mail contents Enter a correct send destination E038 Invalid server number Enter a correct server number E039 Invalid command number Enter a correct command number 4 2 IM MW100 01E 4 1 Error Display on the
70. hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK Output cause Output cause occurrence occurrence ON ON Alarm Alarm OFF OFF Status lamp oe Oo Status lamp o e ALARM ALARM O oe Oo Monitor screen Monitor screen a dE 3 alarm view e alarm view oe 90 o 9 eo By clicking the Alarm ACK button in the browser s monitoring screen or by sending an equivalent communication command Operation Modes and Statuses The MW100 has a Setting mode in which input ranges and other settings can be entered and a Measurement mode in which data acquisition is performed The mode switches depending on the measurement item of the status information Mode Status Info Description Measurement Setting mode STOP For entering range system communication and display settings Measurement mode START For data monitoring computation and recording The instrument must be in measurement mode in order for the status of computation and recording to be START 1 14 IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Tag Strings You can select whether to display tags or channel numbers on all channels Communication Specifications The MW100 can communicate with external devices using its Ethernet or serial communication port Login Function This function ensures that only previously registered users can obtain access when communicating with the MW100 For instructions see section 3 2 Connecting to the MW100 There are two levels of user access rights
71. instruments is selected from the following 100 200 250 500 ms or 1 2 5 or 10s Timeout time From the following select a timeout time for no response from the specified slave after sending commands from the main unit 100 200 250 500 ms or 1 s Number of retries The number of transmissions attempted if no response to commands from the main unit are received from the slaves Select from the following OFF 1 2 3 4 or 5 Communication recovery time You can select from the following the send interval for the command sent after the point at which there is no response from the slaves after sending commands the specified number of retry times Soon communication interval 1 to 120 s Wait between commands Select a time to wait between receiving of the response to a command until the next command is sent 0 10 20 50 100 ms Supported function The functions that the MW100 supports are as follows Function Code Function Operation 3 Read hold registers MW100 loads data from the hold registers of 4XXXX AXXXXX another instrument to its communication input channel data 4 Read input registers MW100 writes data from the input register of SXXXX 3XXXXX another instrument to its communication input channel data 6 Simple write to hold MW100 writes to the hold register of registers 4XXXX another instrument 4XXXXX 16 Write to hold registers MW100 writes to the hold register of AXXXX AXXXXX another instrument
72. interval is used Number of Measurement Capacity of the CF card Saved CHs Interval 128MB 512MB 1GB 10 ms 8 8 hours 35 3 hours 2 8 days 100 ms 3 7 days 14 8 days 28 9 days 10 CHs 500 ms 18 5 days 74 days 144 days 1s 37 days 148 days 289 days 2s 74 days 296 days 578 days 100 ms 36 8 hours 6 1 days 12 0 days 500 ms 7 7 days 30 days 60 days 24 CHs 1s 15 3 days 61 days 119 days 2s 30days 122days 239days 100 ms 14 8 hours 2 4 days 4 8 days 500 ms 3 0 days 12 3 days 24 1 days 1s 6 1 days 24 6 days 48 days 60 CHs 2s 12 3 days 49 days 96 days 5s 31 days 123 days 241 days Write message During execution of the recording action a message that corresponds to the recorded data can be included in the file No of characters in message Up to 15 Messages 5 No of write operations Up to 10 per file Operation upon failure recovery If a power failure occurs during recording the data up to the failure is restored upon recovery from the failure The data after recovery is recorded continuously to newly created files Operation when synchronizing time If time synchronization to SNTP is carried out during recording the time is saved to the data acquisition log file IM MW100 01E 5 7 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Thinning Recording Function Apart from the measured and computed values file a set of thinned values from the measured and
73. less RTD resistance and DI contact x10 VDC continuous Other measurement ranges 120 VDC continuous Normal mode voltage DC voltage DI LEVEL 1 2 times the range rating or less 50 60 Hz peak value including the signal component Resistance 2 kQ RTD 100 Q 500 Q 1000 Q types 50 mVpeak Resistance 200 Q RTD 10 Q 25 Q 50 Q types 10 mVpeak Resistance 20 Q 4 mVpeak Normal mode rejection ratio For integration time of 16 67 ms or more 40 dB or more 50 60 Hz 0 1 For integration time of 1 67 ms 50 60 Hz is not rejected Common mode voltage 600 VACrms 50 60 Hz reinforced double insulation Common mode rejection ratio 50 60 Hz 0 1 500 unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows When the integration time is 16 67 ms or more 120 dB or more When the integration time is 1 67 ms 80 dB or more Common mode voltage between channels DC voltage DI 120 VACrms 50 60 Hz RTD resistance 50 VACrms 50 60 Hz 5 34 IM MW100 01E 5 6 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications Noise rejection Rejection by the integrating A D converter and the use of low pass filters Input resistance For DC voltage 1 V range or less 10 MQ or less For DC voltage 2 V range or higher Approx 1 MQ Insulation resistance Between input terminal and earth terminal 20 MQ or more 500 VDO Input bias c
74. lives Such applications include nuclear power equipment devices using radioactivity railway facilities aviation equipment air navigation facilities aviation facilities and medical equipment If so used it is the user s responsibility to include in the system additional equipment and devices that ensure personnel safety Do not modify this product IM MW100 01E Safety Precautions WARNING Use the Correct Power Supply Ensure that the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply before turning ON the power Connect the Protective Grounding Terminal Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent electric shock before turning ON the power Do Not Impair the Protective Grounding Never cut off the internal or external protective earth wire or disconnect the wiring of the protective earth terminal Doing so invalidates the protective functions of the instrument and poses a potential shock hazard Do Not Operate with Defective Protective Grounding or Fuse Do not operate the instrument if the protective earth or fuse might be defective Make sure to check them before operation Do Not Use in the Presence of Flammable Liquids Vapors and Dust Do not use the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids vapors and dust Operation in such environments constitutes a safety hazard Do Not Remove Covers The cover should be removed by YOKOGAWA s qualified personnel only Opening the cover is dangerous because some a
75. m a Apply IM MW100 01E uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 2 Connection to the MW100 Modbus Client Setting 3 1 From the Top screen click Communication Setting Modbus Client Setting 3 2 Enter settings in the same manner as for Modbus Master Setting 2 Enter the server number of the server list in the Server box gt Communication Setting gt Modbus Client Setting 3 por READ ca mmn cms ce cea cw a I al zl EL C L D JJ wo 0 171 gf I I I al fw for si Ej lg Login Function and User Settings Using this function you can restrict access to previously registered users From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt User Setting Login Function Select the Enable check box This enables the login function User Settings 1 Select ADMIN or USER in the Level list under User List Only ADMIN can be selected for list number 01 2 Enterthe user name to set in the User Name box under User List 3 Enterthe password to assign to the user in the Password box under User List Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt User Setting v IM MW100 01E 3 3 System Settings Setting Mode System Reconstruction When connecting the MW100 for the first time or when changing the position of an installed input output module on the connected MW10
76. ms interval setting range 60000 Set at 0 to 100 000 0 001 resolution Duty accuracy at a load resistance 100 Q or less For 1 ms interval setting range 0 017 or 2us whichever is longer For 10 ms interval setting range 0 0035 or 2us whichever is longer When the load resistance is greater than 100 Q the output duty can shift Output format External power supply sourcing ON resistance 2 Q or less when output current is 200 mA or more Output capacity 1A ch max however 4 A or less total for all modules A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit Once the current limit circuit is ON the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF maintains the output OFF status After turning OFF external power supplies check the load then start up the external power supply again This module has a built in fuse The built in fuse protects against fires or abnormal emissions of heat due to load shortages or other abnormalities It does not protect against damage to internal circuits Power consumption Approx 2 5 W not including power consumption of external power supply Terminal type Clamp attached and removed in units of 4 channels Applicable wire size 0 08 to 2 5 mm AWG28 to 12 External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5kg IM MW100 01E 5 43 uoneoyioedg eo 5 10 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Outp
77. of the universal input module is nearly at room temperature so the actual thermocouple output differs from the value in the table for the thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C standard The universal input module measures the temperature of the input terminal and compensates by applying a corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the actual thermocouple output Therefore when the measurement terminal is shorted equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0 C the measured value indicates the temperature of the input terminal When calibrating the universal input module this compensation voltage thermoelectromotive force of the 0 C standard corresponding to the input terminal temperature must be subtracted from the output of the standard generator before application As shown in the figure by using the 0 C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0 C you can input the 0 C thermoelectromotive force from the DC voltage standard and perform the calibration Wiring Diagram Thermocouple wires or Copper wires TC extension wires 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Make a similar connection in the case of a 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Input terminal Thermocouple DC voltage standard wires wires Cold junction 0 C
78. operations eseeseeeennn relative time timer relay excitation state relay output factor settings relay settings ern ener rte remote RIO overt ie e PEPPER PEERS SERE RO ETE remote RJC RRJC reference channel is resistan E ioo neiieluui epe ED INAIIUFUI REIS resistance temperature detector 1 24 1 27 1 29 ziW ep U RS 232 communication sessssssssssssss RS 232 interface ini RS 422A 485 communication ssssssssss RS 422A 485 interface ssssssssssseeeeeee IM MW100 01E Index 3 Index S saving alarm summaries saving and loading setup data saving settings concerti kiniinin saving the data acquisition log file 1 20 saving thinned data Scale values Screw terminal block screw terminal plate sesesseenene self test operation sessseeeeeene send data control Server list settings essseee Server settlhigjs acce a eo nien setting mode eret tereti setting the filter coefficient setting the input range seeeeeenee setting the match time sssssseseeeee setting the math span Setting the measurement span setting the measurin
79. rdg 10 digits or less Effects from the signal source resistance Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal source resistance of 1 kQ DC voltage 1 V range or less 10 uV or less 2 V range or higher 0 15 of rdg or less Thermocouple 10 uV or less However when burnout is set 150 uV or less RTD Fluctuation per 10 Q change per line 3 lines all same resistance for 100 types 0 1 C or less other than 100 Q types 1 0 C or less fluctuation resulting from difference in resistance between lead wires of 40 mQ max difference among three wires approximately 0 1 C for Pt100 Effect of position Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule Effects of vibration The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0 2 m s is 0 196 of rdg 1 digit or less General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 60 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C External Dimensions Units mm 150 8 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 5 28 IM MW100 01E 5 5 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Style number S1 Type of measurement DC voltage
80. separately M4 screws that can be attached to a DIN rail see the figure below Loosen the attachment screw for the connector cover and open the connector cover 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module Attachment to a DIN Rail 10 CH screw terminal block 772061 10 CH screw terminal block 772061 Attachment screw for connector cover Attachment screw Connector cover Connection cable between the input module J and screw terminal block 772062 0XXX Length 050 or 100 cm Attachment screw Latch lever b Terminal cover B Pull down to detach IM MW100 01E 2 7 Bui pue uonejieisul Hu 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires General Precautions When Wiring the Input Output Signal Wires A To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source and signal source are turned OFF After making the connections secure the terminal cover and do not touch the terminals with your hands For signal wires on which voltage exceeding 30 VAC 60 VDC is applied relative to the ground potential or between signals use reinforced double insulation wires For all other signal wires use basic insulation wires For the withstand voltage of insulation wires see the table below Applied Voltage Vrms or VDC Basic Insulation Double reinforced insulation 3
81. server the MW can transfer or delete files according to commands from a PC HTTP function Enables entry of settings on the MW100 starting and stopping of measurement computation and recording and real time monitoring of measured and computed values using a Web browser as well as acquisition of CF card files using WebDAV RS 232 Interface C2 Option Connection method Point to point Communications Half duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bits Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select either 7 or 8 bits Parity Select Odd Even or None Stop bit Select either 1 or 2 bits Hardware handshaking RS CS can be used Software handshaking X ON X OFF can be used Receive buffer length 2047Byte Protocol Dedicated protocol and Modbus RTU Communication services Send receive setting values send receive measured and computed values RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option Connection method Multi drop 4 wire 1 32 2 wire 1 31 Communications Half duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 or 115200 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select either 7 or 8 bits Parity Select Odd Even or None Stop bit Select either 1 or 2 bits Receive buffer length 2047Byte Protocol Dedicated protocol and Modbus RTU Communication services Send receive setting va
82. side of the base plate To remove the module loosen the attachment screw pull down on the latch lever on the rear panel of the module and pull the module straight from the base plate cover Base plate accessory sold separately Module connector ide hol Can be attached Guide holes by hooking the top section of the cover to the top edge of the base plate and pressing down on the lower section of the cover Module attachment screw Latch lever pull up to remove the module from the base plate Base plate Input Output module 2 4 IM MW100 01E 2 3 Attaching the Modules Attachment Positions and Channel Numbers Channel numbers are recognized as follows Browser monitor and commands Channel numbers within units Example CH001 Data Viewer software Unit number Channel number within units Example CH01001 Representation of channel numbers L Channel numbers in a unit 001 060 Unit number 00 89 5 4 3 2 1 0 Slot number 041 050 021 030 001 010 051 060 031 040 011 020 4 Channel number in the unit The last one digit on a 4 channel module is 1 to 4 The last one digit on a 6 channel module is 1 to 6 The last one digit on a 8 channel module is 1 to 8 IM MW100 01E 2 5 Bui pue uonejeisul s 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Terminal Arrangement Markings on the Terminal
83. standard temperature device Note Calibration of temperature measurements of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit using thermocouples differs from calibration of DC voltage and RTD ranges in that the input cannot be adjusted If the temperature measurement calibration using thermocouples does not meet the accuracy specifications check thoroughly for input error and other problems then contact your Yokogawa dealer or representative If errors exist in the thermocouple wires and TC extension wires correct calibration is not possible Be sure to use a calibrated thermocouple 4 16 IM MW100 01E 4 5 Parts and Maintenance This instrument does not have parts that need periodic replacement However the main module model MW100 has wearable parts listed below Also the aluminum electrolytic capacitors below are included with each input output module There is no replacement service for the parts listed If you are to use the MW100 for an extended time repair or replace the main module according to the service life of the parts and taking into consideration the actual usage conditions Part Name Lifespan Remarks Lithium battery Approx 10 years When used under standard operating conditions One battery is used Aluminum electrolytic Approx 10 years When used under standard operating conditions capacitor The main module and PWM output module have fuses These fuses cannot be replaced by the user If the fuse blows con
84. than if the time is reset the time after the change is recorded Saving Alarm Summaries During the recording stop operation alarm summary information is saved in text format to a log file named ALARMLG TXT Example of an Alarm Summary Date Time Channel Alarm status m 05 03 25 10 12 13 000 001 1H off The following are the alarm statuses 05 03 25 11 14 12 000 001 1H on Alarm number 05 03 25 11 14 12 000 002 3L off Alarm type 05 03 25 11 14 13 000 001 1H off m ON OFF 05 03 25 11 14 21 000 001 2H off 1H off 05 03 25 11 14 36 000 002 3L on 05 03 25 11 14 36 000 001 1H on 05 03 25 11 14 54 000 001 2H on 05 03 25 11 15 18 000 002 3L off 05 03 25 11 15 22 000 005 4L off 05 03 25 11 15 25 000 005 4L on Newest information EN Termination mark Note While recording is paused during measurement if the Stop key is held down the data acquisition log and alarm summary log are created in the root directory of the CF card 1 20 IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module E Mail Function Log Output The following logs can be output using communication commands For information about log statuses and messages see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Item Notation Request Type Operation error log ERROR No saved Alarm summary ALARM No saved Strain input initial balance result BALANCE No displayed D
85. the Modbus server at regular intervals Loaded data are assigned to the communication input channels C001 C300 of the MATH function M1 option Up to ten Modbus servers can be registered Ethernet MW100 Client MW100 server IM MW100 01E suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Modbus Server Function See Figure on Previous Page Modbus clients connect to an MW100 acting as the Modbus Server and read from or write to its internal registers Measured data and alarm statuses from measurement channels measured data and alarm statuses from MATH channels data from communication input channels and time information are stored in the MW100 s registers Up to four clients can be connected simultaneously RS 422A 485 Communication C3 Option In a multi drop four wire configuration up to thirty two units can be connected A dedicated protocol and the ModbusRTU protocol are supported Using communication commands you can send and receive settings and measured and computed values Modbus Master Function The MW100 can connect to a Modbus slave device and load measured data The operation is the same as the Modbus client function Target devices Modbus slaves are identified with addresses MWh100 master o Data from slave device Pee Pera ramum Serial communication Data to slave device V y Modbus slave device E Modbus Slav
86. thinning time in the Recording Interval list A time shorter than the measurement interval specified for the measurement group cannot be set 2 Select a recording operation in the Recording Action list 3 Select a recording data length from the Data Length list Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Thinning Recording M Enable Recording Interval 4S E Recording Action SINGLE H Data Length 30M Apply Recording Channel Settings You can set the channels to which data is recorded or thinned 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting Recording Channel Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Recording and Thinning Settings 1 Turn ON recording in the Recording list when recording data 2 Turn ON data thinning in the Thinning Recording list when thinning data Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Channel List 031 040 No Recording Thinning Recording psc or BIOS d ss fon Hon sd ose fon MII fon d fos fou fon s ps on BIOS d Apply IM MW100 01E uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 5 Setting Measurement Conditions Measurement Channel Settings Measurement Channel Settings You can set the input type range span computations scale and differential input The selectable input type range and other settings can differ depending on the module For details see the explanation of the functions of individual modules in chapter 1
87. time of send request Notification of remaining space on media E mail is sent when the remaining time on the CF card is determined to be less than the specified time Contents Total and remaining space on CF card and the time of send request Notification of power ON E mail is sent when the power is turned ON Contents Time power was cut and turned ON Error notification E mail is sent when an operation error occurs Contents Error number and message and time of send request Fixed time report E mail is sent every specified time interval Contents Instantaneous values of the measurement and MATH channels when selected and the time of send request Reference time setting Set in units of one minute between 00 00 and 23 59 Time interval Select 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 or 24h Test E mail is sent when test is executed If a mail send request occurs during sending of another message the request is ignored IM MW100 01E 1 21 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Subject The e mail transmission type is added to the subject A user specified string can be added to the transmission type in the subject The following subject topics are available E Mail Type Subject Alarm notification Alarm Summary user specified string File creation notification File End user specified string Notification of remaining space on media Media Remain
88. used for data acquisition on site as a standalone enabling data acquisition on up to 360 channels using the Modbus TCP function System Configuration The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be flexibly configured for a variety of measuring environments One to one Connection with a PC This is an example of a system for small scale logging setting the IP address and other tasks PC Using a Web browser Easy setting entry Monitoring of measured data Using PC software IP address setting Calibration T Input Output module Main module Standalone Configuration This is an example of configuration for an on site standalone data acquisition system IM MW100 01E suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 Bi 1 1 System Overview One to N Connection with a PC This is an example of a configuration suitable for relatively large scale data acquisition tasks Connections can be made via Ethernet or RS 422A 485 Acd ooeooo QQQ QUU Tuc RS 422A 485 MW100 Data Acauisition Unit 1 2 IM MW100 01E 1 1 System Overview One to N Connection with the PC This is an example in which multiple PCs are connected to the MW100 for performing data monitoring suonounJ Jo uoneuejdxa3 B MW 100 Data Acquisition Unit Connecting to Modbus Devices This is an example of configuration of a system with connec
89. value at that point Straight lines can link those specified points and the values at each elapsed time are output No of set points 32 Elapsed time from start point 0 to 86400 sec Start point time Fixed at 0 Limitation on specification of elapsed time Only 1 output value per specified time allowed Output values 30000 to 30000 Four levels per channel Type Upper limit and lower limit only No hysteresis function available In the monitor screen when the MATH performance meter exceeds 100 some computations at each MATH interval cannot be completed and loss of computed data occurs When this happens the previous computed value is held If computation loss occurs frequently lengthen the MATH interval to reduce the load To stop computation promptly press the Stop key on the main module When the volume of computations is high Display updating on the monitor screen response to computation stop operations and other behavior may be slow To stop computation promptly press the Stop key on the main module IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Operation after power failure If a power failure occurs during a computation the value computed just before the power failure is recalled after recovery and computation starts using that value Type Value after power failure recovery MATH channel data Holds previous value Communication input channel data Holds previous value Flag input ch
90. wire size 0 08 to 2 5 mm AWG28 to 12 A 1A current limit circuit is built in to the output circuit Once the current limit circuit is ON the circuit continues to operate unless the external power supply is turned OFF This module has a built in fuse The built in fuse protects against fires or abnormal emissions of heat due to load shortages or other abnormalities It does not protect against damage to internal circuits IM MW100 01E 2 15 Bui pue uonejieisul fs 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Wiring with the Digital Output Module NO o 0o 250 VDC 0 1 A 250 VAC 2 A or S c 30 VDC 2 A resistance load O Main Output Specifications Contact mode A contact SPST Contact capacity 250 VDC 0 1 A 250 VAC 2 A or 30 VDC 2 A resistance load Terminal type Clamp attached and removed in units of 5 channels Applicable wire size 0 08 to 2 5 mm AWG28 to 12 Note Do not connect anything to the empty terminals of the digital output module 2 16 IM MW100 01E 2 5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Connections with the Power Cord Power Supply Cord Basic Specification Code 1M A To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF To prevent shock or fires only use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa together with the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Make sure to perform protective earth grounding to prevent el
91. 0 system reconfiguration is performed to match up with the actual modules Before reconfiguration connect to the MW 100 to be reconfigured N00 Y FSM HHS Always turn the power to the MW100 OFF before attaching or removing input output modules Setting Module Information 1 From the top page click System Setting gt Module Information 2 Ifthe Configured Module and Attached Module boxes are different click the Reconstruct button to reconfigure the system Top gt System Setting gt Module Information Module Information No Configured Module Attached Module Status E p B wxrro UNv Mto MX110 UNV M10 E fe pedro umv Ha MxnO UNV R4 SSCS Reconstruct Setting the Date and Time Sets the date and time on the MW100 1 From the top page click System Setting gt Date and Time 2 Enterthe year month and date in the Date box Use the last two digits of the Western calendar for the year 3 Enterthe hour minute and second in the Time box Time is specified in 24 hour format 4 Enter the hour and minutes in the Time Zone box 5 Click the Apply button Top gt System Setting gt Date and Time Setting Date year B date Bj nj Um fe pF pm Time Zone E E Apply IM MW100 01E uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 3 System Settings Formatting the CF Card Checking the Free Space and System Information and Initialization You can format the CF card and check t
92. 0 60VDO to 100 620 Vrms 1000 Vrms 101 to 150 840 Vrms 1400 Vrms 151 to 300 1390 Vrms 2300 Vrms 301 to 600 2210 Vrms 3700 Vrms To avoid electric shock when removing the terminal plate or block and wiring the terminals attach the terminal block or plate to the input output module before inputting or outputting signals Electric shock or fire can result if signals are applied to the terminals if the terminal block is removed from the input output modules When wiring to the screw terminal plate or screw terminal block use round insulation coated crimp on lugs on the terminals for 4 mm screws on the screw terminal block or 3 mm screws on the screw terminal plate that do not come out when loose To prevent fire use signal wires of the following temperature ratings Module Type Temp Rating Screw terminal 75 C Analog output module PWM output module signal wires 85 C Universal input module digital input module digital output module 80 C 4 wire RTD resistance input output module strain input module N CAUTION e Ifa large pulling force is applied to the input output signal wires connected to the MW100 the terminal or signal wire may break To prevent this from happening secure all the wiring cables to the installation panel Wiring of the Strain Input Module NDI When connecting a bridge head in order that the empty weight of the cable does not exceed 5 kg ensure that the cable does not hang down more
93. 0 Data Acquisition Units to a single PC PC Tata Hub LAN cable MW100 Data Acquisition Unit MW109 Ethernet port C d Oe B Checking the Communication Status You can check the status on the two LEDs at the upper right and lower right of the Ethernet port For the LED indications see section 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Initializing Settings Use dip switch 1 on the main module to initialize settings including the IP address assigned to the MW100 1 Turn OFF the power to the MW100 2 Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF 3 Turn OFF the power to the MW100 After the 7 segment LED indicates the power ON self check bF is displayed 4 Check the status of step 3 then turn the power OFF 5 Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 back ON Check that the settings were initialized by using the IP setting software accessory For information on the indications of the dip switches and the power ON self check see section 1 3 Functions of the Main Module IM MW100 01E 2 21 Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 Connecting the RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option Terminal Wiring and Signal Names C C5 C5 C5 Co CD FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA SERIAL COMM FG Frame Ground Case grounding for the main unit SG Signal Ground The signal ground SDB Send Data B Send data B SDA Send Data A
94. 0 L amp N Cu10LN 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED Cu10WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY Cu10BAILEY 200 0 to 300 0 C J263B J263B 0 0 to 300 0K Cu10 at 20 C Cu10a392 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00392 Cu10 at 20 C Cu10a393 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00393 Cu25 at 0 C Cu25 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00425 Cu53 at 0 C Cu53 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00426035 Cu100 at 0 C Cu100 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 x 1 4 Pt25 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE high resolution Cu10GEH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N high resolution Cu10LNH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED high resolution Cu10WEEDH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY high resolution Cu10BAILEYH 200 0 to 300 0 C 1 24 IM MW100 01E 1 4 Functions of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Resistance Temperature Detector 2 mA cont Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt100 high noise resistance Pt100 2R 200 0 to 250 0 C JPt100 high noise resistance JPt100 2R 200 0 to 250 0 C Cu100 GOST Cu100G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu50 GOST Cu50G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu10 GOST Cu10G 200 0 to 200 0 C DI Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range LEVEL LEVEL Vth 2 4V Contact input CONTACT 100 Q or less ON 10 KQ or less OFF Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 20
95. 0 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20s 30s 60s The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval For details see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Measurement Synchronization Measurement is synchronized on each channel IM MW100 01E 1 25 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 5 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module This module allows up to ten inputs of DC voltage thermocouple 3 wire RTD and digital input DI at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms Measurement Input Types Measuring Range Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Measurement Input Type Notation No measurement SKIP DC voltage VOLT Thermocouple TC Resistance temperature detector RTD DI DI Remote RJC RRJC DC Voltage Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range 20 mV 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV 60 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV 2V 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 6V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 V 20 000 to 20 000 V 100 V 100 V 100 00 to 100 00 V 60 mV high resolution 60 mVH 0 000 to 60 000 mV 1V 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V 6 V high resolution 6 VH 0 0000 to 6 0000 V Thermocouple Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Type R R 0 0 to 1760 0 C Type S S 0 0 to 1760 0 C Type B B 0 0 to 1820 0 C
96. 0 writes to the main instrument s 4XXXX communication input data Register Assign Modbus Server Functions and Sharing Input Registers Data Data Type Im 30001 Lower byte of measured data of measurement channel 001 Int 32 30002 Upper byte of measured data of measurement channel 001 9 E 30119 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060 30120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060 S No decimal place information o 3 31001 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 001 Float 31002 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 001 31119 Lower byte of measured data from measurement channel 060 31120 Upper byte of measured data from measurement channel 060 Includes decimal place information 32001 Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 001 Bit string 32060 Alarm status of measured data of measurement channel 060 e Register structure and alarm status values Alarm 2 1 4 3 4 bits 4bits 4bits 4 bits 0 No alarms 1 Upper limit alarm occurs 2 Lower limit alarm occurs 3 Differential upper limit alarm occurs 4 Differential lower limit alarm occurs 5 Rate of change upper limit alarm occurs 6 Rate of change lower limit alarm occurs 33001 Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001 Int 32 33002 Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001 33599 Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300 33600 Upper byte of computed data of computa
97. 00 5 000 so z cow fiov szi 1600 15000 0 000 DL up a sp L T TT La aa L L L L pz o LEP EEE ERE Dx ps 5 Ap 3 at IM MW100 01E 3 23 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 9 Analog PWM Output Settings Output Range Settings PWM Output You can set the output type action range span pulse interval preset value and reference channel Output Type In the Mode box select PWM to output or SKIP to not output Output Action Settings Select TRANS transmission output or COM arbitrary output in the Action box Setting the Pulse Resolution Select the pulse resolution in the Range box Span Setting Select the actual output range from the allowed output range Enter the lower limit of span in the Lower box under Span Also enter the upper limit value in the Upper box Pulse Interval In the Pulse Interval box enter a coefficient that determines the pulse interval Preset Value In the Preset Value box enter a preset value for the output operation when turning on the power or when an error occurs When a preset value is selected in the output operation settings the specified value is output Reference Channel Settings Enter an input channel or MATH channel for transmission output in the Ref Channel box This is set if TRANS is selected for the output method Click the Appl
98. 00 to 6 0000 V 0 05 of rdg 20 digits 0 1 of rdg 100 digits 1000V R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 4 C S Except 0 to 100 C 3 7 C 100 to Except 0 to 100 C 10 C 100 to 300 C 1 5 C for R and S 300 C 5 C for R and S B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 400 to 600 C 2 C less than 400 to 600 C 7 C less than 400 C not guaranteed for B 400 C not guaranteed for B 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 3 5 C Ki 200 0 to 1370 0 C Except 200 C to 100 C Except 200 C to 100 C F 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 6 C 0 1 C ET 200 0 to 800 0 C e J 200 0 to 1100 0 C _ 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C 0 1 of rdg 2 5 C 5 T 200 0 to 400 0 C Except 200 C to 100 C Except 200 C to 100 C L2 200 0 to 900 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C for J and L 0 1 of rdg 5 C for J and L 2 U 200 0 to 400 0 C z N3 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 3 5 C e w 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 7 C g KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 7K 0 1 of rdg 3 5K 0 1K 3 0 05 of rdg 2 5 C 0 1 of rdg 12 C S PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C Except 300 to 700 C 6 C Except 300 to 700 C 25 C 0 1 C 29 less than 300 C not guaranteed less than 300 C not guaranteed a pn NiNiMo 0 0 to 1310 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 2 7 C 9 9c 0 05 of rdg 2 C 0 1 of rdg 7 C E 2 5 WRe3 25
99. 001 to C300 Writing channels 001 to 060 A001 to A300 C001 to C300 Server specified by registered number 1 to 10 Input registers Same as Modbus master function Hold registers Same as Modbus master function Type Same as Modbus master function Communication possible with Modbus TCP protocol Communication media Port Communication interval Ethernet 10Base T 502 tcp 100 200 250 or 500 ms or 1 2 5 or 10s Maximum no of simultaneous connections 4 Receive timeout Supported function Register assignments Modbus error response Drops communication connection if packets not received for 30 s fixed or more Same as Modbus slave function However there is no function code 8 Same as Modbus slave function Same as Modbus slave function IM MW100 01E uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications E Mail Format In the explanations that follow C277 means carriage return line feed Alarm Notification E mail Format Subject Subject Syntax CRLF Alarm Summary Alarm_Summary CRLF DATE_yy mo ddCRLF TIME_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF Alarm Summary CRLF cc lq aaaCRLF eec ceci 5s mmmm lq aaaCRLF eec ceo CRLF S cc uuuuuufdddddEfpCRLF eec cocco 5229c 9 9eccvc925 5 s mmmm feeeeeeeeEfpCRLF eec cec o c2c0i9 5 2222 2 9 CRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss Ge mmmm aaa uuuuuu ddddd Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 0
100. 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt MATH Group Settings 2 Enterthe channel numbers to be grouped in the Channel Set box Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in A001 A003 A006 or specify a range as in A004 A008 3 Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt MATH Group Setting mo maaa ea ea ja m m A i IM MW100 01E 3 19 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 6 MATH Settings MATH Channel Settings and the M1 Option Program Channel Settings 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt Program Channel Setting 2 Select SINGLE or REPEAT in the Action box for the program channel number you wish to use 3 Enterthe elapsed time and setting value in the Point Set box For information about formats see section 1 13 MATH Functions M1 Option 4 Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt Program Channel Setting No Por SINGLE v 0 0 10 500 20 500 30 800 40 800 50 0 1 0 Poz REPEAT v Jo 0 10 20 25 0 50 0 1 0 ps Joc sf Apply Setting Mode Meas Mode Communication Input Data Settings 1 From the top screen click Channel Settings gt COM Input Channel Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list 3 Enterthe communication input data value i
101. 1 eon nuncupati 1 36 Operation upon Startup and Errors nennen 1 36 Output Operation during Calibration eseeeeeeeeneneennennennenns 1 36 1 10 Functions of the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module sse 1 37 QUIPUL Types ism te n ADD REA am tuin 1 37 Output Methods ic 3 eee plaut ael rie iae ie eu RS 1 37 Outp t WaVvefOlt c sede wees cete dte tede ae ple m e et rel eem dee 1 37 Pulse Interval ee i e und deett iut 1 37 Output Update Interval crecer area p retra obe EORR EROR Y 1 37 o eas Y 1 37 Operation upon Startup and Error Occurrence ssesssseeeeeeeeennes 1 37 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module 1 38 Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence sessesseeeeeenennns 1 38 Output Format RU RERO de HUNE read eine 1 38 Output on Disabled Channels sess nnns 1 38 Output Operation per Settings and Setting Changes sseeeess 1 38 Steady Output Operation a roin pn nena B ERR AED UR EET HRS 1 40 Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality 1 40 1 12 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module 1 42 Output Types 3 encender neret ete dae reete Dt 1 42 Output Update interval sranani a eee fepe nb n iret d 1 42 Relay Excitation State
102. 1 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Seconds 00 to 59 Measurement ch no 01 to 60 SKIP channels not output MATH ch no A001 to A300 Alarm level 1 to 4 Alarm type H L h 1 R r H upper limit alarm L lower limit alarm h differential upper limit alarm 1 differential lower limit alarm R high limit on rate of change alarm r low limit on rate of change alarm Alarm status off on Data status N D O E N normal D differential input O over E error Unit information output using 6 chars left justified mV mV V iV C e XXXXXX user specified char string Data symbols Data mantissa measurement channel 00000 to 99999 32767 to 465535 Normally allowed output range 99999 OVER ERROR measurement error occurs or indefinite 99999 OVER eeeeeeee Data mantissa measurement channel 00000000 to 99999999 99999999 to 99999999 Normally allowed output range 99999999 OVER 99999999 OVER Exponent 0 to 4 Blank 5 16 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications File Creation Notification E mail Format Subject Subject File End Syntax CRLF File EndCRARLF Time CRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ssCRLF CRLF File Name CRLF fl fnCRLF CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 fl Folder name fn File name Bl
103. 100 Viewer Software that comes standard with the MW100 main module MW100 Communication IM MW100 17E Describes the communication command of the Command Manual MW100 main module This manual describes the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit style number S2 Check the style number on the name plate of the main module see page iv for the location of the name plate The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA representative dealer or sales office Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without the permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP IP software have been developed created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking Software Release 1 that has been licensed from the University of California at Berkeley Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated Java and logomark are are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc
104. 21 11 52 Mode rotate D request time 05 06 01 21 11 52 100ms 30M cells 1 05 06 01 21 11 52 10CHs 706KB No displayed 05 06 01 21 11 53 Create 60110002 No saved 05 06 01 21 11 47 Record start 2 05 06 01 21 11 56 Mode fullstop D 05 06 01 21 11 56 200m5 30M 4cells 05 06 01 21 11 56 10CHs 354KB 05 06 01 21 11 56 Create 60120002 05 06 01 21 11 47 Record start M 05 06 01 21 11 59 Mode rotate D 05 06 01 21 11 59 100m5 30M 4cells 05 06 01 21 11 59 2CHs 212KB 05 06 01 21 11 59 Create 601M0000 05 06 01 21 14 50 Record stop 1 05 06 01 21 14 53 Record stop 2 05 06 01 21 14 56 Record stop M 05 06 01 21 14 58 Create ALARMLG 05 06 01 21 14 58 Create RECORDLG Update 3 44 IM MW100 01E Chapter 4 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions 4 1 The main module has a two digit 7 segment LED The 7 segment LED displays the System status This section describes the displays on the 7 segment LED when errors occur on the system and their corrective actions For information about normal displays other than for errors see section 1 3 Functions of the Main Module If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions below contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Errors upon Startup The left and right digits of the 7 segment LED display b and an error code respectively The LED illuminates Display Probable
105. 29 1 31 1 35 measurement interval 1 12 1 28 1 30 1 31 measurement mode eene 1 14 3 3 measurement module settings sseesssss 3 13 measurement synchronization 1 25 1 28 1 30 1 31 measures against noise eene 2 28 measuring range 1 23 1 26 1 29 1 31 1 35 mechanical specifications eese 5 1 media alarm notification eeseeseeseeeeeeee 3 34 Hurra m message settings modbus client setting modbus master function modbus master setting modbus server function eeesssseees modbus settings emnt tton tnnt nias modbus slave function modbus RTU modbus TCP 10109 l MERO EET i module errors 52 2 exec endi nia iia paroi ERR FR OR ER RRE Rex module information modus slave function monitor display 5 5 nre nens N NO instrument number seseen i rion hold rr res normal operating conditions numerical display retro etti enne O edge operating humidity 2 initiiert rs operating temperature cece eeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeenee operation error display i Operation MOOS err itex eet saingi iia aanraai ndia operation upon error occurrence
106. 3 8 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 Setting Alartms x tote ehe A a Datebgie e teet 3 21 Alarm Setting Al DI sesssessssessieesseeeeeee nenne enne nnne neret entere nre nennen 3 21 Alarm Setting MATE 252 5 dn ice eta p Een DR REG EUH Re 3 21 Digital O tput Settings niser dep ee hte emat pete den 3 22 Relay Settiligs i toc o metit metet tees ery esi ie eh bots atte te ied 3 22 Analog PWM Output Settings sssssssseseeeeneeeeeeneneenneenneee neret enne 3 23 Output Range Settings Analog Output sssssseseeeenenenen enne 3 23 Output Range Settings PWM Output sse enne 3 24 Output Operation Settings sssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeneee nennen nnne nnne 3 25 Transmission Output Control seisis ete nennen nennen enne 3 26 Event Action Settings see a a a a E a A E E aE 3 27 Timer and Match Time Settings sse nennen 3 28 Timer Settings i en e Neto qe e n e ere tees 3 28 Setting ttie Match Times tren D Ue RR EE REOR Ee ERES 3 28 Scale Input Methods 2 ee eme B e a ep teo ennt elles 3 29 Sc le Vallis usse CR UAE OA EU MONA 3 29 Starting and Stopping Measurement Computation and Recording 3 30 Starting and Stopping Measurement esssssssseeeeenenee nennen 3 30 Starting and Stopping Computation sssssseeeeeneenennen nnns 3 30 Starting and Stopping Recording
107. 50 0 C Ni100 DIN 60 0 to 180 0 C 3i 95 of 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Ni1209 70 0 to 200 0 C p D 3 Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE4 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N4 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 1 of rdi 2C 0 2 of rdg 5 C o Cui0 WEED 200 010300 0C grag pere ore Cu10 BAILEY4 200 0 to 300 0 C J263B 0 0 to 300 0K X 0 05976 of rdg 0 3K 0 1 of rdg 1 5K 0 1K es b uc 200 0 to 300 0 C zu 0 196 of rdg 2 C 0 296 of rdg 5 C EE RTO Cu10 at 20 C 200 019 300 0 C iibi Vids ui Measurement alpha 0 00393 current 1 mA Cu25 at 0 C 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 196 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C 0 1 C alpha 0 00425 ae e us EOS zx 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C CuI HU G 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 4 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C 0 1 C Cu10 GE T high resolution 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N l 200 0 to 300 0 C righ Fouad 0 1 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 1 C u jo high resolution rp Cu10 BAILEY high resolution 7 200 0 10300 0C PT100GOST 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 0576 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu100GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu50GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 0576 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu10GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 196 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 1 C DI Level Vth
108. A Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt500 Pt500 200 0 to 600 0 C Pt1000 Pt1000 200 0 to 600 0 C Resistance Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range 20 Q measured current 1 mA 20 ohm 0 000 to 20 000 Q 200 Q measured current 1 mA 200 ohm 0 00 to 200 00 Q 2 kQ measured current 0 25 mA 2000 ohm 0 0 to 2000 0 Q DI Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range LEVEL LEVEL Vth 2 4V Contact input CONTACT 1 KQ or less ON 100 KQ or less OFF shunt capacitance 0 01 uF or less Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 30s 60 s The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval For details see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Measurement Synchronization Since measurement is sequential measurement on each channel is not synchronized IM MW100 01E 1 7 Functions of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module This module allows up to four inputs of measurement from strain gauges and strain gauge type sensors at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms B12 B35 NDI Up Loy Terminal cover NDIS terminal Input terminal clamp terminal 4 4 t Measurement Input Types Measurem
109. Absolute Time Timer ABSOLUTE Time up occurs at a time interval after a specified reference time Operation upon power failure differs For details see chapter 5 Specifications Also valid prior to the reference time The Event Action function can be started according to the match time setting The following three match times are available Type Notation Description Monthly MONTH Time up occurs every month on specified date and time hr and min Weekly WEEK Time up occurs every every week on the specified day of the week and time hr and min Daily DAY Time up occurs every day at the specified time hr and min Conditions can be set for no operation For details see chapter 5 Specifications For information about operation during power failures and time changes see chapter 5 Specifications IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Event Action Function By linking the Event function and Action function you can control the operations of the main unit The following types of events are available Some items may not be available depending on the options installed Event Type Notation Start Specification Contact input DI Channel number Alarm occurrence ALARM Alarm on specified channel ALARM CH Channel number alarm level number Recording start MEMORY Relay action RELAY Relay number Timer event occurrence TIMER Timer number Match time event occ
110. Always hold and pull by the plug If the power cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement NENNEN Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VACrms Supply voltage range used AC power supply 90 to 250 VACrms Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable line frequency range 50 60 Hz 296 Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used 1 Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF 2 Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover 3 Connect the plus red and minus black wires from the AC adapter and the protective ground wire to the power supply terminal as in the figure below 4 Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw MMR gc cO OC A d EH Ste x I Ul UU T 2E Plus wiring Power supply terminal cover 22 T protective Minus wiring grounding line Protective Plus wiring grounding
111. C Cu100 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu50 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Cu10 GOST 200 0 to 200 0 C 0 1 of rdg 2 C 0 2 of rdg 5 C 0 1 C 1 Pt50 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1986 Pt100 JIS C 1604 1989 JIS C 1606 1989 IEC 751 DIN IEC 751 JPt100 JIS C 1604 1981 JIS C 1606 1989 2 SAMA DIN 3 McGRAW EDISON COMPANY 4 Guaranteed accuracy range Cu10 GE 84 4 to 170 0 C Cu10 L amp N 75 0 to 150 0 C Cu10 WEED 20 0 to 250 0 C Cu10 BAILEY 20 0 to 250 0 C 5 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance IM MW100 01E 5 33 5 6 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms hiec ias Resolution Type Range or More ntegration Time 1 67 ms 1 Digit RTD Pt5002 200 0 to 600 0 C aco Nes 0 05 of rdg 3digits 0 1 of rdg 1 5digits 0 1 C mA Pt10002 200 0 to 600 0 C 20 Q Measurement 0 000 to 20 000 Q 0 05 of rdg 7digits 0 1 of rdg 25digits 0 0010 current 1 mA 200 Q Resistance Measurement 0 00 to 200 00 Q 0 05 of rdg 3digits 0 1 of rdg 15digits 0 012 current 1 mA 2kQ Measurement 0 0 to 2000 0 Q 0 05 of rdg 3digits 0 1 of rdg 10digits 0 12 current 0 25 mA DI Level Vth 2 4 V Threshold level accurac
112. Connection Setting Up Ethernet for the First Time IP Address Unclear Ethernet connections are not possible under the factory default settings You must enter an IP address 1 After opening an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC run the MW100 Viewer software CD ROM or the IP address setting software installed on the PC You can select to enter a fixed IP address or have the address automatically obtained by DHCP If you select a fixed IP address enter the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS Skip to the procedures under Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP Address Including DHCP For the setting procedure see the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E You can also start up and connect using a fixed IP address When Connecting to an MW100 with a Specified IP Address Including DHCP 1 Open an Ethernet connection between the MW100 and PC then start the browser Enter the host name or IP address of the MW100 in the browser s URL Address box The MW100 top page appears If the login function is set step 3 is required Ex 1 IP address is 192 168 1 100 http 192 168 1 100 Ex 2 Host name is mw100user http mw100user Before the top page appears the network password entry screen is displayed Enter a user name and password and click the OK button Changing the IP Address and Connecting This is used when an IP address has already been set and the IP address will be changed
113. G28 to 12 External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5kg General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 50 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C External Dimensions Units mm 150 8 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 5 46 IM MW100 01E Appendix Appendix 1 Supported Characters Lower 4 bits When entering characters on the MW100 from a browser the following characters can be used There are limits to which characters can be used depending on the type of entry item For information on the characters can that can be used in communication commands see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Upper 4 bits 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F 0 SP o P p 1 I1 A Q aq 2 2 B R br 3 3 CcSc s 4 4 D Td t 5 9 5 EU eju 6 amp 6 F V fly 7 7G Wg w 8 18 H X h x 9 9 Y i y A J Z j Zz B K k C lt L l D M m E N nj F O o User Specified Strings Alphanumeric English characters can be entered Passwords Alphanumeric English characters can be entered However the following char
114. Input types DC voltage TC 3 wire RTD and DI LEVEL contact Minimum measurement interval 100 ms Maximum number of inputs 6 inputs Input types DC voltage 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance and DI LEVEL contact IM MW100 01E 1 1 System Overview 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module MX112 B12 M04 and MX112 B35 M04 Minimum measurement interval 100 ms Maximum number of inputs 4 inputs Input system floating balanced input isolation between channels Minimum measurement interval 100 ms Maximum number of inputs 4 inputs Input system floating balanced input non isolation between channels Minimum measurement interval 100 ms Maximum number of inputs 10 inputs Input types DI non voltage contact open collector 5 V logic Minimum measurement interval 10 ms Maximum number of inputs 10 inputs Input types DI 24 V logic IM MW100 01E 1 5 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 1 System Overview Base Plate 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module MX120 VAO M08 Output update interval 100 ms shortest Maximum number of inputs 8 outputs Output type DC voltage DC current Output update interval 100 ms shortest Maximum number of inputs 8 outputs Output type PWM Output update interval 100 ms shortest Maximum number of outputs 10 outputs Output type A contact SPST The base plate is equipped with connectors for connectin
115. N ALARM COM ERROR MEDIA De energize DE EN Do not energize when relay output is ON ALARM COM FAIL Available Output Types Also when a condition in which alarm output must be cleared arises you can select whether to turn output relays OFF Non hold or leave them ON until an output clear command alarm ACK appears Hold Hold operation Notation Description Hold ON Non Hold OFF Maintains relay output even after relay output is cancelled Does not maintain relay output when relay output is cancelled normal operation When set to non hold When set to hold Alarm ACK Alarm ACK v Output cause Output cause i occurrencd occurrencd ON Relay output OFF ON Relay output OFF 1 42 IM MW100 01E 1 12 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module Relay Operation Reflash Function The following types of relay operation are available Operation Description AND Output ON when all alarms assigned to each alarm output relay activate OR Output ON when at least one alarm assigned to each alarm output relay activates The relay operates after the first alarm If a second alarm activates the relay restarts after briefly stopping operation e e The non operation period is 200 ms Even if a new alarm occurs during the non operation the non operation time is not extended The number of output relays that can be specified for the reflash functi
116. OD ee internet Z Single Screen and Dual Screens Monitor displays the data from the MW100 For details on the operation see section 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Channel Setting You can set the measuring range expressions and other items Top Channel Setting AIDI Channel Setting DO Channel Setting AO PWM Channel Setting Program Channel Setting MATH Channel Setting MATH Constant Setting COM Input Channel Setting MATH Group Setting Transmission Output Control Recording Channel Setting Alarm Setting CAL DD Alarm Setting MATH Filter Burnout RJC Setting Strain Input Setting System Setting You can set the measurement interval measurement groups and other items Top gt System Setting System Information Save Load Setup Data Module Information Save Option Setting Status Information Date and Time Setting Log Information Daylight Saving Time Setting Measurement Setting Other Settings MATH Settin Recording Setting Thinning Recording Setting AO PWM Preset Setting Timer Setting Match Time Setting Event Action Setting 3 2 IM MW100 01E 3 1 Connection Environment Switching Modes Setting Mode Display Setting You can set tags display groups and other items Top gt Display Setting Channel Tag Setting Display Group Setting Channel Color Setting Other Settings Graph Scale Setting Trip Line Setting Message Setting Communication Setting You can
117. Operation Guide The figure below shows the general flow of operation when the MW100 is installed initially Operations on the MW100 Operations on the PC Section 2 2 and 2 3 Section X X indicates the referred Instal the MW100 sections in this manual and attaching the main module Section 2 4 Wire the input See the Installation and output modules Connection Guide IM MX100 72E Section 2 6 to 2 8 Connect to the network Section 2 5 Connect the power cord Section 3 2 Connect to the Search for all connected MW100s and MW100 configure network parameters such as the MW100s IP addresses Section 3 3 Configure the MW100 system configuration date system setting CF card setup Section 3 4 Enter data Select the acquisition interval to be acquisition used select the recording interval ons set recording start stop conditions etc Section 3 5 Input channel settings input type measuring range measurement span etc Set measurement conditions Section 3 6 MATH channel settings entry of expressions etc MATH settings Section 3 8 Digital output Alarm output manual DO Fail output settings and error output settings Section 3 7 Alarm settings Alarm level and type settings Section 3 9 Transmission output settings Analog PWM output settings Section 3 10 and 3 11 Event settings Event action settings Section 3 14 FTP and e mail Settings for the FTP server mail server settings and other
118. Operators cannot be used to combine conditional expressions MATH span When displaying waveforms on the Web set the upper and lower limit values The setting range is 9 999 999 to 99 999 999 Decimal place setting 0to4 Computation range A given result during computation must be within 3 4 x 10 IM MW100 01E 5 3 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Math output value Data output by the computation for binary output Data Type Description 9 999 999 99 999 999 Normal output range 2 147 450 879 7FFF7FFFh Plus over 2 147 385 343 80018001h Minus over 2 147 319 806 80028002h Skip If the computation fails the previous value is output MATH constants Communication input c Flag input channels Program channels MATH alarm function Loss of computed data 60 Precision Mantissa 5 digits exponent 2 digits Range 9 9999E 4 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 429 hannels 300 Numerical values in expressions can be substituted using communication input Precision Mantissa 5 digits exponent 2 digits Range 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 60 Flag value can be substituted in computational expressions Range 0 1 Varies according to the operation of the Event Action function 3 Broken line data can be input into expressions Setting is possible of up to 32 points of the time from the start point and the output
119. RR MERERI REM ERRE MORD aee 1 19 Log Information ie b sa Re e ee 1 20 E Mail EUnGCIIOR 2 eR ee tet lot ii Pere e Rr det dite eie ee Potes 1 21 Functions of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module ssssssss 1 23 Measurement Input Types ri her them eire Detienen 1 23 Measuring Ranges nec bid ie A ie a e e e dee 1 23 Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter esses 1 25 Measurement Synchronization cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeneesaee 1 25 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module 1 26 Measurement Input Types cceseccesseeceesseceeesceeeeeseeeeeeseeneseeenensceesesieeseneeeeseseeeeesnenens 1 26 Measuring Range uice iter dpi te ive ee pa ode ke gne 1 26 Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter cccceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenneees 1 28 Measurement Synchronization sssessssseeseseeeeneennen nene 1 28 IM MW100 01E Contents 1 6 X Functions of the 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module eene 1 29 Measurement Input Types seeseseeessieeeeeeeeennnenennnen nt nnnnnn nennen entretenir 1 29 Measuring Range niece idet eun ev ipe pn pe D ae 1 29 Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter ssseesseseessssssss 1 30 Measurement
120. RS 232 use a converter Refer to the following table for connections to most converter terminals For details see the manual that came with the converter RS 422A 485 Port Converter SDA TD SDB TD RDA RD RDB RD SG SHIELD FG EARTH 4 Wire In general a 4 wire connection is used with upstream devices For a 4 wire connection the send and receive wires must be crossed r Termination resistance externally attached 120 O 1 2 W or more Termination resistance built in with switch Main unit Upstream RS 422A 485 instrument terminals SD A SDA N SDA O O O SDA SD B SD B SDB O O O SDB Y RD A RD A RD A Y RDA O O O RD A O RD B RD B RD B E RDB O O RD B O SG SG SG a Ve SG SG FG W FG al Dum os Oe ee 1 200602 wwe n Do not connect termination resistance from 1 to n 1 2 Wire On the RS 422A 485 terminal block connect signals of the same polarity for sending and receiving and connect only two wires externally Termination resistance externally attached 120 Q 1 2 W or more Termination resistance built in with switch Main unit Upstream RS 422A 485 instrument terminals SDA SDB RDA RDB IK 9 Du lua B Do not connect termination
121. S Standard power cord DC power Screw terminal BS cable for AC adapter H AC power 3 pin inlet GB CCC Standard power cord DC power Screw terminal GB CCC cable for AC adapter W Screw terminal power supply cord not included Options C2 RS 232 communications interface 5 C3 RS 422A 485 communications interface 5 M1 MATH function Displays Celsius or Fahrenheit Daylight savig time can be set W cannot be selected with 2 3 can only be selected with W C2 and C3 may not be selected together C2 or C3 must be selected to use the Modbus RTU slave function Also M1 must be selected for use of the Modbus RTU master function M1 must be selected to use the Modbus TCP client function iv IM MW100 01E a UN Checking the Contents of the Package Universal Input Module Model Suffix Code Option Code Description MX110 MX100 MWf1 00 universal input module Input type UNV For DCV TC DI 3 wire RTD input V4R For DCV DI 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance input Number of channels and H04 4 CH high speed measurement minimum measurement measurement interval Interval 10 ms M06 6 CH medium speed measurement minimum measurement interval 100 ms M10 10 CH medium speed measurement minimum measurement interval 100 ms Options NC Without the clamp terminal plate A M06 must be selected if V4R is selected Also MO6 cannot be sele
122. Selecting the Action Type 1 Select the action Action function type from the Action list If Flag is selected for the action the Flag box is enabled meaning that the setting in step 2 is required 2 Enter a flag number in the Flag box Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Event Action List 001 010 v No Event Channel Detection Action Flag fr fuser key Sf zi epee sime sve i fs p Ap fence s wessace f s atari sd fuever Memorv stant s favarm cH cbe fi x feoce Memory_stor f fos mevo I fence s vemtsroe iif y uv sim aeoe ea o c be men sip fence s mwem meseT f fo doc sz LHb zb Apply IM MW100 01E 3 27 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 11 Timer and Match Time Settings Setting Mode Timer Settings The time up action function can be controlled through the specified time interval and time From the top screen click System Setting gt Timer Setting Relative Time Timer 1 Select RELATIVE in the Mode list 2 Enterthe desired time interval in the Relative Time boxes The day hour and minute are arranged in order from the left Absolute Time Timer 1 Select ABSOLUTE in the Mode list 2 Enterthe desired reference time in the Ref Time boxes under Absolute Time The hour and minute are in order from the left in the box 3 Selectthe time interval you wish to set in the Interval list under Absolute Time M and H indicate the minute and hour respe
123. Setting check box to save Select the Other Setting check box to save Click the Apply button Save Option oogsom Channel Settings M Save Recording Settings M Save Communication Settings M Save Other Settings M Save Apply 3 36 IM MW100 01E 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings You can monitor display data measured on the MW100 The screen consists of Screen display 1 and Screen display 2 and for each you can select trend display numerical display meter display or bar graph display Monitor Display of Measured Data Single Screen Use this when the monitor contains a single screen You can display one group From the top screen click Single Screen Top Monitor Single Screen m e Ol Q Output Channel 4 31 gt NW ALARM Math Start ion 5 Rec Start Pause Alarm Ack w w o nae UN OFF MathReset Mathclear Message D gt Transmit start a Group Group01 100 msec 20 45 40 Time h 200 msec 20 44 40 20 45 00 20 45 20 20 45 40 20 46 00 20 46 20 Time h m s MAOO 27E123758 F5270 tB HHBrTBS Dual Screen Use this when the monitor contains two screens You can display two groups From the top screen click Dual Screen Top gt Monitor Dual Screen gt m m iit g Output Channel 21 b W ALARM Math St mmm 50 000 Math Start Rec Start Pause AlarmAck Mil B lt MRE MathReset mathCiear Message 9 v gt Transmit Start a Group
124. Synchronization essen enne 1 30 1 7 Functions of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module sess 1 31 Measurement Input Types eessseesssiesesssseeeeneeee enne enses eren neni neben tenerent 1 31 Measuring Range ae et eee a etie iet eur test eet 1 31 Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter cceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeees 1 31 Measurement Synchronization sss nennen nennen 1 31 Initial Balancing Unbalance Adjustment ssm e 1 32 Scaling Settings of the Strain Gauge Type Sensor sse 1 33 1 8 Functions of the 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module sees 1 35 Measurement Input Types eesssseeeseeeeeeeeneen nennen nnne nennen entren nennen nennen 1 35 Measuring Range eri ER REERRPORIBOPUIDUREDBBII ERE TTE 1 35 Measurement Interval eeeesieeseeseeesiseeneee tne e nente enne nnne t enses innen stent 1 35 ElllGrs iiec b Petite tun CS bet agio e fe bet etu SP Pets ees 1 35 1 9 Functions of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module 1 36 Output Types c etus rtc cte teo ls ctc pere eie reta ted eene Leere eh t 1 36 Output Methiod 2 de den eR aped deos ci Leve d Te ee s 1 36 Oultp t Flalge 525 8 ee teh oe r o dn die ott m im ub toti eet de 1 36 Output Update Int tval 5
125. TP2 Transfers a test file to recipient 2 SMTP1 Transfers a test mail to recipient 1 SMTP2 Transfers a test mail to recipient 2 Number of keys Key action User function keys Key lock function Dip switch 1 Time Time function 4 Start key START and Stop key STOP User function key 1 USER1 User function key 2 USER2 START Measurement computation and recording start STOP Measurement computation and recording stop and saving of data acquisition logs and alarm summaries USER1 Write setting values file default USER2 Load setting file default Keys can be assigned arbitrarily by the user with the Event Action function All keys can be enabled or disabled at once Operation upon power ON determined by dip switch settings All switches ON Normal operation Switch 5 only OFF All settings initialized Switch 8 only OFF Fixed IP address 192 168 0 10 Time settings consist of date time and time zone Backup function included Year designation Last two digits of Western calendar 80 to 99 1980 1999 00 to 35 2000 2035 Internal time accuracy 100ppm Daylight saving time Tag Strings During recording During displaying Tag string settings No of characters The time on the internal clock is updated on the specified month week weekday and time Summer On the month week weekday and hour set as Summer time the time on the internal clock is moved one hour ahead
126. TTP Modbus TCP and MW100 dedicated protocol Communication services Send receive measured and computed values send receive Login function List of services Timeout function Keep alive function DHCP function SNTP function E Mail function setting values maintenance diagnostic services and others Use when accessing a setting measurement server maintenance diagnostic server FTP server or Web server Up to 10 can be registered Modbus server Uses Modbus protocol FTP server File transfer services HTTP server Web services SNTP server Time synchronization GENE server For communication commands only for MW100 DIAG server For maintenance diagnostics Connection to server from which no communication is made over a specified period is forcibly dropped If no response is made to periodically sent test packets on the TCP level the connection is forcibly closed The IP address is automatically obtained from the DHCP server As the client this function can acquire time information from the apecified SNTP server when the power is turned on upon start of measurement when the SNTP client is turned ON at a user specified time and at a specified time interval When time information is acquired upon startup measurement start and when the SNTP client is turned ON the time is not applied if the difference between the time of the MW100 and the server is 1 hour or more When the time is acquired at specified time in
127. The following displays cycle while the CF card is being accessed or while calibration is being performed Operation Error Display In error Exxx where xxx is a three digit number the code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately In the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Example Error code E234 Eg 34 t Up to three error codes are saved For the contents of error codes and their meanings see section 4 1 Errors Displayed on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions You can clear one error that is displayed by pressing the Stop key IM MW100 01E suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Measurement Multi interval Filters MATH Measured data sampled at certain intervals is acquired by the various input modules Acquired data is saved to the CF card In addition the main module receives output commands sent from the PC as necessary and generates signal output instructions to the output modules Measurement Intervals Synchronization between modules If set to the same measurement interval measurements made by input modules in the same acquisition unit are synchronized Synchronization between channels On the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module and 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module measurement is synchronized between cha
128. Type K K 200 0 to 1370 0 C Type E E 200 0 to 800 0 C Type J J 200 0 to 1100 0 C Type T T 200 0 to 400 0 C Type N N 0 0 to 1300 0 C Type W Ww 0 0 to 2315 0 C 1 26 IM MW100 01E 1 5 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Thermocouple cont Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Type L L 200 0 to 900 0 C Type U U 200 0 to 400 0 C KPvsAu7Fe KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0 K PLATINEL PLATINEL 0 0 to 1400 0 C PR40 20 PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C NiNiMo NiNiMo 0 0 to 1310 0 C WRe3 25 WRe3 25 0 0 to 2400 0 C W WRe26 WWRe26 0 0 to 2400 0 C Type N AWG14 N14 0 0 to 1300 0 C TXK GOST XK 200 0 to 600 0 C Resistance Temperature Detector 1 mA Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt100 Pt100 1 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 JPt100 1 200 0 to 550 0 C Pt100 high resolution Pt100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C JPt100 high resolution JPt100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C Ni100 SAMA Ni100SAMA 200 0 to 250 0 C Ni100 DIN Ni100DIN 60 0 to 180 0 C Ni120 Ni120 70 0 to 200 0 C Pt50 Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE Cu10GE 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N Cu10LN 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED Cu10WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY Cu10BAILEY 200 0 to 300 0 C J263B J263B 0 0 to 300 0 K Cu10 at 20 C Cu10a392 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00392 Cu10
129. Unit Operation Guide IM MW100 02E Precautions on the Use of the MX100 MW100 Data Acquisition Unit IM MX100 71E MX100 MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Installation and Connection Guide IM MX100 72E Screw for bracket Bracket for base plate Part number B9988DL Part number B8724EF vi IM MW100 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Optional Accessories Sold Separately AC adapter No Name Model Basic Suffix Minimum Note Code Q ty 1 AC adapter 772075 Power supply D 1 Cable for UL CSA code F 1 Cable for VDE R 1 Cable for SAA Q 1 Cable for BS H 1 Cable for GB CCC Terminals No Name Model Minimum Q ty Note 2 10 CH screwterminal 772061 1 Dedicated to the MX110 UNV M10 block with RJC MX115 D05 H10 MX115 D24 H10 3 Connection cable between the input module and screw terminal block 772062 050 1 Cable length 50 cm 4 Connection cable between the input module and screw terminal block 772062 100 1 Cable length 100cm 5 Plate with clamp 772063 1 Dedicated to the MX110 UNV M10 terminals with RJC MX115 D05 H10 MX1 15 D24 H10 6 Screw terminal plate 772080 1 Dedicated to the MX110 UNV M10 MX115 D05 H10 MX1 15 D24 H10 Clamp terminal 772064 1 Dedicated to the MX110 UNV H04 8 Clamp terminal 772065 1 Dedicated to the MX120 VAO M08 MX120 PWM M08 MX125 MKC M10 9 Connector cover 772066 1 For empty slots with no module installed 10 Plate with cla
130. User s Manual MW100 Data Acquisition Unit YOKOGAWA IM MW100 01E 1st Edition Yokogawa Electric Corporation Foreword Notes Trademarks Revisions 1st Edition June 2005 YK Thank you for purchasing the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit This user s manual contains useful information about the instrument s functions installation and wiring procedures operating procedures and handling precautions To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before beginning operation The five manuals below are also provided in addition to this manual Read them along with this manual As with this manual the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E and the MW100 Communication Command Manual IM MW180 01E are included in the accompanying CD ROM Manual Title Manual No Description MW100 Data Acquisition IM MW100 02E Describes concisely the handling of the Unit Operation Guide MW100 Data Acquisition Unit and the basic operations of the MW100 Viewer Software Precautions on the Use of IM MX100 71E Summarizes the precautions regarding the use the MX100 MW100 of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Data Acquisition Unit MX100 MW100 Data Acquisition IMMX100 72E Describes concisely the installation procedures Unit Installation and and wiring procedures of the MW100 Data Connection Guide Acquisition Unit MW100 Viewer Software IM MW180 01E Describes the functions and operations of the User s Manual MW
131. VER Special Math Processing You can select from the following special math processes for the MATH operation when the reference channel results in an error Reference channel Choice for the Computed Result Notation Channel referenced in Set to computation error ERROR expression is error data Ignored and continue computation SKIP Channel referenced in Set to computation error ERROR expression is overflow data Ignored and continue computation SKIP Replace data with upper or lower limit and LIMIT continue computation TLOG MAX TLOG MIN Plus over OVER Channel referenced in the Minus over OVER TLOG P P expression is overflow data CLOG MAX CLOG MIN Calculation Error ERROR Channel referenced in the CLOG P P expression is overflow data The upper and lower limits are as follows Measurement channels Range upper and lower limit Linear scaled measurement channels Upper and lower limit of scaling Computation channels Upper lower limit of span Overflow Processing upon TLOG PSUM Computation Overflow You can select an integral value process for when the TLOG PSUM integral value overflows from the following items Choice for the Computed Result Notation When 99999999 is exceeded computation stops as an overflow OVER When 99999999 is exceeded the next count is 0 and computation continues ROTATE TLOG SUM Computation Integration Units The units of integration are as follows
132. W100 01E 3 14 Network Utility Settings Mail Client Settings These settings configure the e mail function The setting screen contains mail client setting 1 and mail client setting 2 Mail Client Setting 1 1 From the top screen click Communication Setting gt Mail Client Setting 1 2 Selectthe SMTP Client Function check box This enables e mail transmission 3 Enter the name of the SMTP server in the Server Name box under SMTP Server 4 Enter the SMTP server port number in the Port box under SMTP Server 5 Enter the name of the POP3 server in the Server box under POP3 Server 6 Enter the POP3 server port number in the Port box under POP3 Server 7 To require authorization POP before SMTP when sending e mail select POP3 in the User Authorization list This enables entry of the User Authorization items 8 Enterthe name for logging into the POP3 server in the User box under User Authorization 9 Enterthe password for logging into the POP3 server in the Password box under User Authorization 10 Click the Apply button SMTP Client Function M Enable SMTP Server Server smtp degmaster com Port Bo POP3 Server Server pop3 dagmester com Port fio Authorization POP3 Password ecccccee Apply Mail Client Setting 2 1 2 From the top screen click Communication Setting gt Mail Client Setting 2 Enter the subject of the e mail in the Subject box under Mail Header Up to thirty two alphanumer
133. WG26 to 16 ring with the D24 Option 24 V logic input 24V T lo Main Input Specifications D24 Input type DI 24 V logic Input format Common potential between channel Min detection pulse width Twice the sampling interval or more Input threshold level 24 V logic OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or greater Terminal type Clamp Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 IM MW100 01E 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Wiring with the Analog Output Module External power supply Voltage Current 0 1 V Vext pid o T power supply Load Load Direction of current when using current output CAUTION Two power supply terminals are connected internally Therefore do not connect a separate external power supply to them Fire can result Main Output Specifications Terminal type Clamp attached and removed in units of 4 channels Load impedance Voltage 5 kO or more Current 600 Q or less Applicable wire size 0 08 to 2 5 mm AWG28 to 12 Wiring with the PWM Output Module External power supply Pulse width output T p JH V 4to 28V 5 T power supply Load CAUTION Two power supply terminals are connected internally Therefore do not connect a separate external power supply to them Fire can result Main Output Specifications Output capacity 1A ch max however 4 A or less total for all modules Terminal type Clamp attached and removed in units of 4 channels Applicable
134. acters may not be used Space blank and asterisk Host Name Domain Name and Server Name Alphanumeric English characters and hyphens periods and underscores can be used File Name Alphanumeric English characters and 96 and can be used However the following character combinations may not be used AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK IM MW100 01E Appendix 1 xipueddy H Index Index Symbols Page 1 Gauge 3 Wire Method sse 1 Gauge Method ssuss 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module sesseesese 1 6 1 42 5 46 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module nocte 1 4 1 26 5 29 4 Gauge Method 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module 1 4 1 23 5 25 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module 1 5 5 37 6 CH Medium Speed 4 Wire RTD Resistance Input Module ceres 1 4 5 33 7 Segment LED 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module sesesesss 1 6 1 36 5 41 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module 1 6 1 3 A Page A D Integration Time list absolute time timer PG ACAI sos cosets EE T ETT TTD acquisition conditions sesesseeeeenne action function action setting action type Ee Lol M
135. alues Executes resetting clearing of the computed values according to the Event Action function or requests via communication commands or monitor settings Group reset Only the MATH channels set by group up to seven groups are reset by the Event Action function Can be executed using the Event Action function Calculations Basic math x exponentiation Relational operators gt lt lt Logical operators AND OR XOR NOT Arithmetic operators SQR ABS LOG EXP TLOG computations max min max min average integration pulse integration CLOG computations max min max min average Conditional expressions EXPR1 EXPR2 EXPRS3 MATH reference channels Measurement channel MATH channels Communication input channels Flag input channels MATH constant Program channels f an expression refers to its own channel or a channel of a larger number than its own channel the data from the previous MATH interval is used MATH interval Specify one from among the measurement group numbers and perform computation However measurement intervals of 10 ms or 50 ms cannot be specified Characters used in expressions Up to 120 per channel For communication input channels only a maximum of 8 characters can be used per channel Number of stacks 35 or fewer per expression Conditional expression Other expressions can be nested in conditional expressions Conditional expressions can be nested together
136. an set MATH channel alarms 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt Alarm Setting MATH 2 Below enter settings in the same manner as with measurement alarms With MATH alarms there is no hysteresis setting uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH IM MW100 01E 3 21 3 8 Digital Output Settings Setting Mode Relay Settings You can set the operation type excitation status hold operation and reflash 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt DO Channel Setting 2 Select the channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Relay Output Factor Settings Select Relay output factor from the Type box If you select ALARM you must set Energize De energize hold operation and re alarm If you select CommandDO COM you must set Energize De energize Energize Setting Select to energize ENERG or de energize DE EN the relay in the Energize list Hold Action and Reflash Settings 1 Tosetthe relay status to Hold in the Hold list select ON 2 Select arelay operation condition in the Action list 3 Select ON in the Reflash list to perform the reflash function Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Channel List oar 050 No Kind Energize Hold Action Reflash Apply 3 22 IM MW100 01E 3 9 Analog PWM Output Settings Setting Mode You can enter analog and PWM output settings 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt AO PWM Channel Settings 2
137. ank Media Remaining Space Notification E mail Format Subject Subject Media Remain Syntax CRLF Media_RemainCRLF lt Time gt CRLF DATE_yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ssCRLF CRLF Media Info aaaaaaa K byte totalCRLF bbbbbbb K byte freeCRLF CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 aaaaaaa Media capacity KB 0000000 to 9999999 bbbbbbb Media total capacity KB 0000000 to 9999999 Blank IM MW100 01E uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Power ON Notification E mail Format Subject Subject Power Failure Syntax CRLF Power FailureCRLF Power Off CRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ssCRLFE CRLF lt Power_On gt CRLF DATE_yy mo ddCRLF TIME_hh mi ssCRLF CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 Blank Error Notification E mail Format Subject Subject ERROR Syntax CRLF ERRORCRLF Time CRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ssCRLFE CRLF lt ERROR_Message gt CRLF nnn_mmmmmmm CRLF CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 nnn Error number mme mm Error message Blank 5 18 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Periodic Report Notification E mail Format Subject Su
138. annel data Holds previous value Program channel data Holds elapsed time and previous value Remote RJC When the item to be measured is located at a great distance you can setup relay terminals near the item measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module reference channel using thermocouples and use the resultant value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement However the same thermocouple type is used for reference channels and measured channels Alarms Alarm types Upper limit lower limit differential upper limit differential lower limit high limit on rate of change low limit on rate of change Number of settings Four levels per channel ON OFF can be set for each channel and level Alarm setting range DCV TC RTD DI strain resistance scaling and remote RJC Hysteresis Alarm OFF value arbitrarily set Number of alarm outputs 10 to 60 outputs 10 points per DO module Output mode Energize De energize AND OR Hold Non hold Alarm ACK If set to hold using the alarm status or relay output Hold Non hold the hold status is cleared Alarm update interval 100 ms not synchronized with the measurement interval Recorder Structure Measured values computed values thinned values setting values data acquisition logs and alarm summaries can be saved to CF card as a recording action Folders for each file type are created on the CF card and files are saved in them
139. applies to standard operating conditions Ambient temp 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC power frequency 50 60 Hz 1 warm up time at least 30 minutes without adverse conditions such as vibrations One Gauge Method Conversion Measurement Rated Integration time Integration time Input Range Measurement 16 67 ms or more 1 67 ms or more Type Range Measurement Accuracy Resolution Measurement Accuracy Resolution 2000 uStrain 2000 0 uStrain 0 5 of range 0 1 uStrain 2 of range 1 uStrain Strain 20000 uStrain 20000 uStrain 0 3 of range 1 Strain 1 of range 2 uStrain 2 200000 Strain 200000 Strain 0 3 of range 10 uStrain 196 of range 10 uStrain 1 Display resolution is 0 1 uStrain 2 Display resolution is 1 uStrain AD resolution Equivalent to 20000 FS display However excludes 1 67 ms integration time uoneoyioedg AD integration time Measurement Integration Interval Time Filter Rejected Noise and Notes 100 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples 16 67 ms Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples 200 ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 67 or 20 ms 500 ms 36 67 ms Trapezoidal 50 Hz 60 Hz and their integer multiples 1s 100 ms Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples 2s 200 ms 5 10 20 30 60s 200 ms Cos Fc 5 Hz
140. applies to standard operating conditions Ambient temp 2342 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC power frequency 50 60 Hz 1 warm up time at least 30 minutes without adverse conditions such as vibrations Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms Abi Resolution Type Range or More Integration Time 1 67 ms 1 Digit o 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV 0 0596 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 25digits 1pgV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV 2 200 00 to 200 00 mV _ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV o DC voltage 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 0 0526 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 10digits 100 uV m 6 000 to 6 000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 1mV o 20 000 to 20 000 V amp 0 05926 of rdg 2 digits 1mV 3 100 00 to 100 00 V amp 0 0596 of rdg 2 digits 10 mV 0 000 to 60 000 mV 0 05 of rdg 20 digits 0 1 of rdg 100 digits 1uV 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V amp 0 05926 of rdg 2 digits 0 1 of rdg 10 digits 100uV 6V high res 0 0000 to 6 0000 V 0 05 of rdg 20 digits 0 1 of rdg 100 digits 100uV Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C 1419 959 of rdg 0 3 C sid 4s a o JPt1007 200 0 to 550 0 C ee 10 17 ofrdg dea bilis Pt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C
141. are different The temperature error is large or is unstable Change to the correct setting 3 5 The RJC setting is not correct The temperature error is large or is unstable Block the wind from hitting the terminals The wind is hitting the terminals The temperature error is large or is unstable Suppress changes in the ambient temperature such as The ambient temperature change is drastic by inserting it into a box The temperature error is large or is unstable Match the thickness and length of the three wires 2 4 There is an error in the wiring resistance in the case of a 3 wire RTD The measurement error is large or is unstable Take measures against noise 2 10 Noise effects The measurement error is large or is unstable Reduce the signal source resistance such as by Effects from the signal source resistance inserting a converter The temperature error is large or is unstable Stop parallel connections Effects from parallel connections Do not use the burnout setting Measured value from strain gauge type sensor When using a sensor without a remote sensing wire not correct use the DV450 001 conversion cable On the strain module B12 B35 the gauge Enter the correct settings 2 4 method and dip switch settings are not correct On the strain module B12 B35 the gauge Use a module that supports the resistance value of the 2 4 resistance and internal bridge resistance values strain gauge 120 Q B12 for 350
142. as the measurement interval of at least one of the installed input modules MATH Settings In step 1 set the operation upon computation error and in steps 2 and 3 set the measurement input other than for TLOG CLOG computation 1 Select OVER or OVER in the Computation Error Data list 2 Select ERROR computation error or SKIP in the Abnormal Input Data list 3 Select ERROR Overflow value SKIP or LIMIT in the Overflowed Data list IM MW100 01E 3 13 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured Computed Data TLOG and CLOG Computation Sets the operation for TLOG and CLOG computation 1 Select the units of integration in the TLOG Time Scale list 2 Select ERROR computation error or SKIP in the Abnormal Input Data list 3 Select ERROR computation error SKIP or LIMIT in the Overflowed Data list 4 Select OVER computation stop or ROTATE in the PSUM Overflowed Data list Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Computaion Interval Interval Group n zx Computaion Error Data OVER vj Abnormal Input Data ERROR Overflowed Data ERROR TLOG CLOG Computation TLOG Time Scale OFF x Abnormal Input Data ERROR Overflowed Data ERROR PSUM Overflowed Data foveR x Apply Recording Operation Settings From the top screen click System Setting gt Recording Seiting Set the recording operation for each measurement group 1 Select the recor
143. as follows Level Notation Description Administrator privileges ADMIN All functions are available User privileges USER Measured computed data settings log information alarm summaries and status information can be obtained Administrator privileges required to switch operation modes start stop computation and recording or change settings such as the measuring range Ethernet Communication Using 10Base T media the MW100 supports the FTP SNTP DHCP DNS HTTP Modbus TCP SMTP and MW specific protocols e Web Server Function MW100 settings and data can be monitored from a PC using a browser DHCP Client Function The IP address can be automatically obtained from the DHCP server SNTP Function Acting as a client the MW can obtain time information from the specified SNTP server when the power is turned ON When acting as the server the unit can provide time information to other MW100s connected to the network FTP Function As a client the MW can send acquired data files to an FTP server Two recipient locations can be specified When acting as the server the MW can transfer or delete files according to commands from a PC E Mail Function Alarm occurrences and creation of data files can be notified via e mail Two recipients locations can be specified Modbus Client Function M1 option The MW100 can connect to a Modbus server device and load measured data Using Modbus commands the MW100 can load data from
144. asured value p E balance Strain With the MW100 initial balancing is performed in the 10000 ustrain range Initial balance The value when the command is executed is taken as the initial unbalanced value and the measured value is set to zero Reset The value set during initial balancing is reset to zero The initial unbalanced value is used for the measured value as is Note If the measuring range is changed the initial balancing is reset After a range change you must redo initial balancing Initial Balance Selection Items Type Notation Description Reset RESET Resets the initial balance values Execute EXECUTE Executes initial balancing 1 32 IM MW100 01E 1 7 Functions of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Scaling Settings of the Strain Gauge Type Sensor This is an explanation of scaling settings used to measure physical quantities such as load and length using a strain gauge type sensor The basic relational equation is as follows 1 mV V 2000 uSTR equation 1 The following gives two examples one when the rated input and output are known and one when the calibration coefficient is known Hereinafter u strain will be expressed as u STR When the Rated Input and Output Are Known The following specific example provides an explanation Rated input 200N set to Y Rated output 0 985 mV V setto K In this case if a 200 N load is introduced an output of 0 985 mV V r
145. asurement interval and detection within the thermocouple range detection ON OFF possible Up Down setting is possible 2 kQ or less normal 200 kQ or more disconnected shunt capacitance 0 01 uF or less detection current approx 10 uA detection time approx 2 ms Parallel capacity during RTD 0 01uF or less Power consumption Approx 1 2 W External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5 kg Terminal type Clamp terminal board is detachable Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 IM MW100 01E 5 31 uoneoyioedg B 5 5 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Effects of Operating Conditions The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16 67 ms or more Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power up Effects of ambient temperature The effect received by changes in 10 C increments of the ambient temperature is 0 05 of rdg 0 05 of range or less However for Cu10 Q 0 296 of range 1 digit Effects of power fluctuation Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V Effects of magnetic field The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC 50 60 Hz 400 A m is 0 1 of rdg 10 digits or less Effects from the signal source resistance Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage and thermocouple signal source resistance of 1 kQ DC voltage 1 V range or les
146. ata acquisition log RECORD No saved Recording status RECSTATUS No saved Message summary MESSAGE No saved Communication log COM No saved Operation log CMD No saved Computation status MATH No saved Mail client log SMTP No saved Time synchronization client log SNTP No saved HTTP server log HTTP No saved DHCP client log DHCP No saved FTP client log FTP C No saved FTP server log FTP S No saved Modbus client log Modbus C No saved Modbus client command status Modbus CC No displayed Modbus client connection status Modbus CS No displayed Modbus master log Modbus M No saved Modbus master command status Modbus MC No displayed Modbus master connection status Modbus MS No displayed Notification can be made of alarm occurrences and creation of data files by e mail Two recipient locations can be specified Multiple addresses can be specified for each recipient location For details about e mail contents see chapter 5 Specifications E Mail Types The following types of e mail can be generated E Mail Type Operation and Contents of E Mail Alarm notification E mail is sent when measurement or MATH alarms are activated or cleared Contents Channels levels and types of alarms that were activated or cleared instantaneous values of measurement and MATH channels when selected File creation notification E mail is sent when a measured computed or thinned data file is created Contents Created file name and
147. ation by measurement group If free space cannot be secured or when securing of free space takes extended time an error is indicated on the 7 segment LED For details see chapter 4 1 Media Related Errors Direct Trigger You can set the recording start action by measurement group The pretrigger when write start is triggered can be set for each measurement group from 0 to 100 in 10 intervals Pretrigger length When there are fewer than ten data the pretrigger length is rounded up When there are ten or more data the pretrigger length is rounded down Ex Recording interval 600 second data length 1 hour pritrigger 30 96 Number of data in a file 1 hour 600 sec 6 Pritrigger length 6 x 30 100 1 8 about 2 files Posttriger length 6 2 4 You can specify common to all measurement groups whether to record on each channel However the number of recording channels is limited by the measurement interval as follows 1500 ch sec or less Ex Measurement group 1 Recording interval 10 ms 10 ch Measurement group 2 Recording interval 100 ms 50 ch 1s 0 01s x 10ch 1s 0 1s x 50ch 1500 ch sec Set the recording interval for each measurement group as a multiple of the measurement interval For a measurement interval of 50 ms 500 ms or5 s seta multiple of 1 2 4 or 10 Otherwise set a multiple of 1 2 5 or 10 Within approximately 10 MB per file Automatically generated using the date time and serial number MDDIXXXX
148. below Errornumber Module number Ui gt ni Display Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section UO Range information error Servicing required U1 Calibration value error Check the module s installation status then recalibrate the module If the error occurs even after recalibrating servicing is required U2 Calibration reference voltage Check whether the correct calibration reference voltage is value is not correct being applied or whether the channel to which the voltage is during calibration applied is correct U3 Error in writing the calibration Servicing required value U4 The installed module cannot Replace the module with one that can be used be used IM MW100 01E 4 1 eoueueojure y pue BunooysajqnoiL 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions Communication Errors The left and right digits of the 7 segment LED display C and an error code respectively The LED blinks Display Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section CO DHCP address Check network connections Use a Fixed IP address 2 6 3 2 acquisition error Check with your network administrator whether your environment supports acquisition of addresses by DHCP C1 DNS name error Check network connections Check with your network manager 2 6 to determine whether your environment supports host name registration See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E Settings E
149. bject Periodic Data Syntax CRLF Periodic DataCRLE Time CRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ssCRLF CRLF lt CH_Data gt CRLF S cc uuuuuufdddddEfpCRLF ec ccs 22 2c9e99 s mmmm feeeeeeeEfpCRLF ec ccs 22522212 5v 22 CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 S Data status N D O E N normal D differential input o over E error cc Measurement ch no 01 to 60 SKIP channels not output mmmm MATH ch no A001 to A300 SKIP channels not output uuuuuu Unit information output using 6 chars mV mV V SM AC C xxxxxx user specified char string f Symbols ddddd Data mantissa measurement channel 00000 to 99999 eeeeeeee Data mantissa measurement channel 00000000 to 99999999 p Data exponent 0 to 4 Blank Test E mail Format Subject Subject Test Syntax CRLF TestCRLF Time CRLF DATE yy mo ddCRLF IME hh mi ssCRLF CRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Seconds 00 to 59 Blank IM MW100 01E 5 19 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications User Interface Other Functions Communication Test This function checks whether the FTP and mail transmission settings are entered correctly Notation Description FTP1 Transfers a test file to recipient 1 F
150. cal distribution system such as provided by a wall outlet IM MW100 01E 5 1 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Measurement Style number 2 Measurement range and accuracy See the measurement range and accuracy given in the specifications of each input module Maximum number of inputs 60 inputs however only up to six modules can be controlled Measurement interval Select from 10 50 100 200 500 ms 1 2 5 10 20 30 or 60 s Up to three intervals defined for the input modules can be set multi interval Also the following limitations apply to the measurement interval and number of measurement channels Measurement Interval Number of measurable channels 10 ms 10 10 ms and 50 ms mixed 10 50 ms 30 Synchronization between modules Synchronized within the same sampling interval in the same unit Synchronization between channels Filter function 4 CH High Speed Universal Module and Digital Input Module Synchronized between channels 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Six Channel Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module and the 4 CH High Speed Digital Input Module Due to the scanner type not synchronized between channels First Order Lag Filter Applicable measurement types For each channel of DC voltage thermocouple RTD strain and resistance you can select a time constant time until 63 296 of the output value is reached corresponding t
151. can damage the modules Maximum input voltage x10 VDC between H L continuous Maximum common mode voltage Between input and ground 250 VACrms B12 B35 30 VACrms NDI Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the analog output modules or the PWM output modules Doing so can damage the modules Maximum common mode voltage Between output terminals and earth terminal 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz e This is a measurement category Il IEC61010 1 and overvoltage category II CSA1N 61010 1 instrument r Consider the points indicated below to prevent noise from entering the measurement circuit For information about measures against noise see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Keep the measurement circuit away from the power supply cable power supply circuit and ground circuit Itis desirable that the object under measurement is not a noise source However if this is not avoidable insulate the object under measurement and the measurement circuit In addition ground the object under measurement Shielded wires are effective against noise caused by electrostatic induction As necessary connect the shield to the ground terminal of the MW100 make sure this does not lead to grounding at two points Twisting the measurement circuit wires at short intervals is relatively effective against noise caused by elect
152. cannection E530 SMTP function not available Enable the function E531 SMTP connection failed Check the SMTP server address and the main unit address setting Also check the Ethernet cable cannection E532 POPS connection failed Check the POPS server address and the main unit address setting Also check the Ethernet cable cannection E550 SNTP function not available Enable the function E551 SNTP command response failed Check the SNTP server address and the main unit address setting Also check the Ethernet cable cannection System Errors The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E999 System error Servicing required IM MW100 01E 4 7 eoueueojure y pue BunooysajqnoiL 4 2 Error Display in the Monitor Screen and Corrective Actions Error Message Corrective Action Could not connect to the instrument Check cables and other connections Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices Communication error occurred Check cables and other connections Check Ethernet cable connections and the IP addresses of devices The actually installed modules differ from the modules recognized by the system Reconstruct th
153. cknowledged 3 Time up occurs every month on the specified day every week on the specified time or every day at the specified time The setting is set in 1 minute intervals When the power fails or the clock is changed and the timeup time is exceeded the time up is not acknowledged Two types of settings initialization are available Initialization of all settings Initializes all setting values and measured values on the main unit You can perform initialization through communication commands or by resetting the dip switch positions and turning ON the unit When initialized using communication commands module recognition information is not initialized Initialization of all settings excluding communication parameters All settings and measured values except for communication parameters and module recognition information are initialized Executed using communication commands IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Initialization of the CF Card Formats the CF card Format type CF card size General Specifications Operating temperature 20 to 60 C Operating humidity Power consumption Insulation resistance Withstand Voltage External dimensions Weight External Dimensions Supports FAT16 logical format only 2 GB maximum 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C Approx 8 W Between power supply terminal and earth terminal 20 MQ or
154. cle list under Communication 4 Select a timeout time from the Communication Timeout list under Communication 5 Inthe Gap between Messages list under Communication select a gap time from receiving of the response until the sending of the next command 6 Select a number of times in the Retransmission list under Recovery Action 7 Enter a recovery wait time in the Wait Time box under Recover Action 8 Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt Modbus Master Setting 1 Cycle 18 X Communication Timeout 100mS v Gap between Messages OFF Retransmission 1 E Wait Time 0 E Apply Modbus Master Setting 2 1 From the Top screen click Communication Setting gt Modbus Master Setting 2 Select the command number group to be set from the Command List list Select READ WRITE in the Function box Enter the address of the slave device in the Slave box Enter the numbers of the used registers in the Register box When specifying multiple registers enter the first register number Select a data type in the Data Type list Enter the channel numbers used in the Channel boxes Click the Apply button eu o qm OND Top gt Communication Setting gt Modbus Master Setting 2 ee ee ER oe 4 4 4 009 orF 010 OFF Apply LJ J wI JJ 7 LL 4 4 3 6 IM MW100 01E 3 2 Connection to the MW100 Modbus Client Setting 1 i
155. constant K01 1 When channel 003 lt constant K01 0 Less than LT 004 LT K10 When channel 004 lt constant K10 1 When channel 004 constant K10 0 Greater than GE 003 GE K01 When channel 003 constant K01 1 or equal to When channel 003 lt constant K01 0 Less than LE 004 LE K10 When channel 004 lt constant K10 1 or equal to When channel 004 gt constant K10 0 Arithmetic Functions Type Operators Example Explanation Absolute value ABS ABS 001 Finds abs val of measured values on ch 001 Square root SQR SQR 002 Finds sqr rt of measured values on ch 002 Common logarithm LOG LOG 003 Finds common log of measured data on ch 003 Exponent EXP EXP 005 Finds e where x is the measured data on ch 005 TLOG Functions The TLOG computation computes the maximum minimum maximum minimum integral average and pulse integral of the specified channel One function can be used per expression Type Operators Example Explanation Maximum value TLOG MAX TLOG MAX 001 Finds max value of measured values on ch 001 Minimum value TLOG MIN TLOG MIN 002 Finds min value of measured values on ch 002 Maximum value TLOG P P TLOG P P 003 Finds P P of the measured data on ch 003 to minimum value Integral value TLOG SUM TLOG SUM 004 Finds integral val of measured values on ch 004 Mean value TLOG AVE TLOG AVE 005 Finds the avg value of measured values on ch 005 Pulse In
156. cted if UNV is selected The NC option can be specified only when M10 is specified Strain Input Module Model Suffix Code Option Code Description MX112 MX100 MWf1 00 strain input module Input type B12 Internal bridge resistance 120 Q B35 Internal bridge resistance 350 Q NDI NDIS connector for connections to an external bridge head Number of channels and M04 4 CH medium speed measurement minimum measurement measurement interval and measurement interval 100 ms Digital Input Module Model Suffix Code Option Code Description MX115 MX100 MWf1 00 digital input module Input type D05 Non voltage contact 5 V logic open collector input D24 24 V logic Number of channels and H10 10 CH high speed measurement minimum measurement and measurement interval measurement interval 10 ms Options NC Without the plate with the clamp terminals Analog Output Module Model Suffix Code Description MX120 MX100 MW100 analog output module Output type VAO Voltage current output PWM Pulse width modulation output Number of channels and M08 8 CH minimum output update interval 100 ms output update interval Digital Output Module Model Suffix Code Description MX125 MX100 MWf1 00 digital output module Output type MKC A contact output Number of channels and M10 10 CH minimum output update interval 100 ms output update interval Base Plate Model Suffix Code Desc
157. ctively Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Timer List No Mode Relative Time Absolute Time Ref Time Interval el ol B fesor WM WM b Be fin Fier al ET eT eT a flor x mm A E bF s m A Ek jJ umm sz Apply Setting the Match Time From the top screen click System Setting gt Match Time Setting Monthly Timeup 1 Select MONTH in the Mode list 2 Enter the desired date and time in the Time list The day hour and minute are arranged in order from the left Weekly Timeup 1 Select WEEK in the Mode list 2 Select a day of the week from the Time list and enter the desired time in the Time box Enter the hour and minute in the second and third box from the left respectively Weekly Timeup 1 Select DAY in the Mode list 2 Enter the desired time in the Time box Enter the hour and minute in the second and third box from the left respectively Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Match Time List No Mode Match Time p vows zh He B weer sewzp a Es E Apply 3 28 IM MW100 01E 3 12 Scale Input Methods Scale Values The following explains the methods for inputting scale values Enter only the desired number of digits in the box for the upper and lower limit values of scale Select the number of digits after the decimal point from the list Desired Scale Number Input Decimal Point Position 0 00 to 100 00 Lower limit 0 Upper l
158. d voltage Power consumption Terminal type Applicable wire size External dimensions Connect a device with capacity of 250 mA or more Between output terminals and earth terminal 20 MO or more 500 VDC Across output terminals non isolated terminal common potential 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between the output terminal and earth Across output terminals non isolated terminal common potential Approx 2 5 W not including power consumption of external power supply Clamp attached and removed in units of 4 channels 0 08 to 2 5 mm AWG28 to 12 Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5 kg General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 50 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C IM MW100 01E 5 41 uoneoyioedg eo 5 9 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module Specifications External Dimensions 150 8 Units mm If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm Output Span Setting Limit value of V mode and mA mode Modes Output Setting span Setting span Output 7 lower limit lower limit upper limit upper limit V mode 11 V 10 V 10 V 11 V mA mode O mA O mA 20 mA 22 mA OVER preset value
159. der of the ON OFF width of the detection period approximately 75 to 90 of the measurement interval Measurement interval of 5 s or more Use the wider of the ON OFF width of approximately 4 5 s Minimum detection pulse width Twice the sampling interval or more Input threshold level D05 Contact non voltage contact open collector 100 Q or less ON 100 kQ or more OFF LEVEL 5 V logic OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more D24 LEVEL 24 V logic OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or greater Hysteresis width D05 Approx 0 1 V D24 Approx 1 5 V Contact transistor rating 15 VDC or greater and 30 mA or greater Transistor with a rating of Vce gt 15 VDC and Ic gt 30 mA Maximum input voltage D05 10 V D24 50 V Insulation resistance Between input terminals and ground 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Withstand Voltage 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between input and earth Maximum common mode voltage 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz Terminal type Clamp Power consumption Approx 1 5 W Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approximately 0 5kg General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 60 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C External Dimensions 150 8 Units mm
160. dg 1 5 C Measurement Ni100 SAMA2 200 0 to 250 0 C current 1 mA Ni100 DIN2 60 0 to 180 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Ni1203 70 0 to 200 0 C Pt100 high noise resistance 200 0 to 600 0 C o o 0 1 of 25 o JPE100 high noise resistance 200 0 to 550 0 C 09 of rdg 0 3 C SUAE teg ee one Pt100 GOST 200 0 to 600 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 C Pt100 200 0 to 600 0 C _ 9 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 1 JPtt00 200 010550 0 C WM nad M old Pt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C 1 9 95 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 01 C JPt100 high res 140 00 to 150 00 C Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C Cu10 GE4 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N4 200 0 to 300 0 C 0 1 of rdg 0 7 C 0 2 of rdg 2 5 C 0 1 C Cu10 WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY4 200 0 to 300 0 C J263B 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 3K 0 1 of rdg 1 5K 0 1K Sue at 205C 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00392 0 1 of rdg 0 7 C 0 2 of rdg 2 5 C 0 1 C Cu10 at 20 C 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00393 CHES MU ee 200 0 to 300 0 C amp 0 196 of rdg 0 5 C 0 2 of rdg 2 C 0 1 C RTD alpha 0 00425 Measurement C53 at 0 C 50 0 to 150 0 C current 2 mA SIpha 0 00426035 0 05 of rdg 0 3 C 0 1 of rdg 1 5 C 0 1 C Sue aroc 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 4
161. ding start timing in the Mode list under Interval Group If you select DIRECT steps 2 and 3 are required and if you select TRIGGER steps 2 to 5 are required Select the recording operation in the Action list under Interval Group Select the recording interval in the Recording Interval list under Interval Group Select a recording data length from the Data Length list under Interval Group Select a pretrigger length 96 from the Pre trigger list under Interval Group o om Recording Operation Settings 1 Select a recording data length from the DIRECT Data Length list Measurement groups for which the recording start timing is DIRECT are all set to this 2 Selectthe remaining space time in the Limit for Media Alarm list When the specified remaining amount is reached you can have output such as relay output occur Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Interval Group No Mode Action Recording Data Pre Interval Length trigger Recording Action DIRECT Data Length 30M v Limit for Media Alarm 1HE Apply 3 14 IM MW100 01E 3 4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured Computed Data Thinning Operation Settings From the top screen click System Setting Thinning Recording Setting Thinning Settings Select the Enable check box Thinning recording is enabled and you can enter thinning recording settings Setting the Thinning Interval Recording Operation and Recording Data Length 1 Selectthe
162. dule b System errors Operation when power is turned ON bF Dip switches FO ROM error F1 SRAM error F2 EEPROM error F3 Battery error F4 Ethernet error Output modules UO Range information error Operation when power is turned ON or U1 Calibration value error When output value uncertain U2 Error during calibration Internal communication error occurred resulting in an error recovery event If the error recovery time is 10 s or more output is performed per the operation for U3 Error in writing the error occurrence and then output is calibration value executed per the operation for power ON U4 Unusable modules Operation when power is turned ON or when output value uncertain Input modules UO Range information error Operation when errors occur transmission U1 Calibration value error between units output only since the transmission source input channel is illegal U4 Unusable modules P gal The number corresponding to the error is shown in the 1 40 IM MW100 01E 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Output Operation during an Abnormality by Output Setting Output Setting Abnormal Status Output Operation Transmission Referenced input channels are Over Outputs a value 5 of the specified output within units span of the output channel Referenced input channels are Over Outputs a value 596 of the specified span of the output
163. e LEVEL LEVEL OFF at 6 V or less and ON at 16 V or more Measurement Interval Select 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s or 60 s Filters The module detects ON OFF as shown below to prevent the effects of chattering If the measurement interval is set a value greater than four times the chattering period measurement is possible by avoiding chattering effects Measurement interval of 5 s or less Use the wider of the ON OFF width of the detection period approximately 75 to 90 of the measurement interval Measurement Measurement Measurement Detection interval Measurement interval x 75 to 90 e interval interval interval i i lt pl t gt it x Detection Detection Detection interval interval interval i i To h i f i f 1 i i gt 0 n 1 i 1 iL f 1 f iLL Chattering Measurement interval of 5 s or more Use the wider of the ON OFF width of approximately 4 5 s IM MW100 01E 1 35 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 9 Functions of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module The module has eight outputs for voltage or current An external power source 24 V is required for current output For voltage output only an external power source is not required Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Output Types Output Type Notation No output SKIP Analog
164. e Function Modbus master devices can connect to other MW100s acting as Modbus slaves and read from or write to their internal registers The MW100 registers are the same as those for the Modbus server function Modbus master device Serial communication Data from master device MWh100 slave Modbus slave device For instructions on connections see section 2 7 Connections Using the RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option RS 232 Communication C2 Option This is a point to point system A dedicated protocol and the Modbus RTU protocol are supported Using communication commands you can send and receive settings and measured and computed values The MW100 operates as the Modbus master or slave For information about the operation see RS 422A 485 Communications C3 Option For instructions on connections see section 2 8 Interface Connections C2 Option IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Saving Data to the CF Card Save Location Measured computed data thinned data data acquisition logs alarm summaries and settings can be saved on the CF card These files are saved in the folder structure shown in the figure n CF card conFIG C3 DATA DATAO000 DATAO001 DaTao002 C3 DATAxxxx Settings folder Save folders for measured computed and thinned data The DATA folder includes all folders up to DATAxxxx Folders are created each time recording star
165. e module configuration The size of the data files exceeds the allowable upper limit Set the number of save channels recording interval and recording data length so that the data files of measurement groups 1 2 and 3 and the computed and thinned data files are all within 10 MB Value smaller than measuring interval or MATH interval cannot be set for the thinning recording interval Set a value higher than the measurement and MATH interval Combination of thinning recording interval measurement interval MATH interval incorrect Set the thinning recording interval so that it is a common multiple of the measurement and MATH intervals The recording data length cannot be set equal to or less than the recording interval Set a recording data length larger than the recording interval Insufficient space on the CF card Delete unneeded files on the CF card to free up some space Replace the CF card The CF card is not inserted Insert the CF card The CF card is damaged or not formatted Reinsert the CF card or format it No data found in file Check the recording settings Remove MATH start stop action from the Event Action settings Remove MATH start stop action from the Event Action settings Remove recording start stop action from the Event Action settings Remove recording start stop action from the Event Action settings 4 8 IM MW100 01E 4 3 Troubleshoo
166. e of data file for measurement group 3 Set the number of saved channels recording interval and exceeds the upper limit recording data length so that the data file of measurement group 3 does not exceed 10 MB E133 Size of MATH data file exceeds the upper limit Set the number of saved channels recording interval and recording data length so that the MATH data file does not exceed 10 MB E134 Size of thinned data file exceeds the upper limit Set the number of saved channels recording interval and recording data length so that the thinned data file does not exceed 10 MB E135 Cannot set smaller value for thinning recording Set a value for the thinning recording interval higher than interval than measuring or MATH interval the measurement and MATH interval E136 Invalid combination of thinning recording Set a value for the thinning recording interval than is a common measuring and MATH interval multiple of the measurement and MATH intervals E137 Cannot set smaller value for thinning recording Set a value for the thinning recording data length that is larger data length than thinning recording interval than the thinning recording interval E138 Cannot set recording operation for measurement Set the measurement interval of the measurement group group with no measuring interval number to something other than OFF E139 Invalid recording interval Set a recording interval which can be set to the measurement interval of the measurement group
167. eceive buffer reaches 1537 bytes RS is set to False and when the buffer reaches 511 byte RS is set to True Connection Examples OFF OFF XON XON e CS RS CTS RTS PC MW PC MW SD 3 SD SD 3 SD RD 2 RD RDL 2 RD RS 7 RS RS 7 RS CS 8 CS CS 8 cs sa 5 sa se 5 sG XON RS XON RTS PC MW The RS on the PC side and the CS SD 3 SD on the instrument side do not need RDLI gp tobe connected for control 7 RS However we recommend that they 778 CS be connected so that the cable SG 5 SG can be connected in either direction Note Acomputer program must be created such that the receive buffers of the instrument and computer do not become FULL When selecting XON XON output data in ASCII format 2 26 IM MW100 01E 2 9 Serial Interface Settings Selecting the Baud Rate Select a baud rate from the list below 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Setting the Data Length Select a data length from the list below When outputting data in binary format you must use 8 bits 7 8 Selecting the Parity Check Select a parity check from the list below ODD EVEN NONE Selecting the Stop Bit Select a bit length from the list below 1 2 Selecting the Handshaking Method Select a handshaking method from the list below This setting is only valid when using the RS 232 interface OFF OFF XON XON XON RS CS RS Select
168. ectric shock Connect the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit power cord into a three prong electrical outlet with a protective grounding terminal The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal Also do not use the functional ground terminal see 2 2 Installation as a protective ground terminal Donotuse an extension cord without protective earth ground Otherwise the protection function will be compromised Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VACrms Supply voltage range used AC power supply 90 to 250 VACrms Rated supply voltage frequency 50 60 Hz Allowable line frequency range 50 60 Hz 2 Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 70 VA maximum when six modules are used Note Do not use a supply voltage in the range 132 to 180 VAC as this may have adverse effects on the measurement accuracy Check that the power switch of the main module is OFF Connect the accessory power cord plug to the power connector of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Use the power cord that came with the package Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to the outlet that meets the conditions above The AC outlet must be of a three prong type with a protective earth ground terminal D Co Power connector IM MW100 01E 2 17 Bui pue uonejeisul fs 2 5 Connecting the Power Supply
169. ent Input Type Notation No measurement SKIP Strain STR Measuring Range Strain Input Measurement Range Type Notation Rated Measuring Range 2000 uSTR 2000 uSTR 2000 0 to 2000 0 uSTR 20000 uSTR 20000 uSTR 20000 to 20000 uSTR 200000 uSTR 200000 uSTR 200000 to 200000 uSTR Measurement Interval Integration Time and Filter You can select from the following measurement intervals for this module 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10 s 20 s 30 s 60s The integral time and types of filters applied vary depending on the measurement interval For details see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Measurement Synchronization Since measurement is sequential measurement on each channel is not synchronized IM MW100 01E 1 31 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B5 1 7 Functions of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Initial Balancing Unbalance Adjustment When configuring a bridge circuit with a strain gauge due to the slight deviation in resistance of the strain gauge the bridge circuit will not necessarily be balanced even if the strain of the circuit under test is zero and the measured value may not be zero the value in such cases is called the initial unbalanced value Therefore when taking measurements you must first balance the bridge and if the strain is zero obtain a measured value of zero This is called initial balancing setting the initial unbalanced value to zero Me
170. ental conditions during transport and storage Ambient storage temperature 25 to 70 C Ambient storage humidity 5 to 95 RH no condensation Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 4 9m s or less Shock 392 m s or less packaged condition Mechanical Specifications Excluding AC Adapter External dimensions Approx 455 x 131 x 159 mm when six slots are attached Weight Approx 4 3 kg maximum total weight Installation method Desktop or floor panel mount or attached to a DIN rail Material Steel plate aluminum die cast molded plastic resin Standards Compliance CSA CSA22 2 No 61010 1 overvoltage category Il measurement category Il pollution degree 2 UL Conforms to UL61010B 1 CSA NRTL C CE EMC directive EN61326 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 Low voltage directive EN61010 1 overvoltage category Il measurement category pollution degree 2 C Tick Conforms with AS NZS CISPR11 Class A Group1 Overvoltage category Il An index for defining transient overvoltages includes the rated impulse withstand voltage and applies to electrical equipment supplied with power from fixed installations such as a distribution board Pollution degree 2 The degree of adherence by a solid liquid or vapor that reduces the withstand voltage or surface resistance factor applies only to normal indoor atmospheres with non conductive pollution Measurement category Il For measurements performed on circuits directly connected to the electri
171. er s manual This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions L Functional ground terminal do not use this terminal as a protective ground terminal Protective grounding terminal Alternating current For the protection and safe use of the product and the system controlled by it be sure to follow the instructions and precautions on safety that are stated in this manual whenever you handle the product Take special note that if you handle the product in a manner that violates these instructions the protection functionality of the product may be damaged or impaired In such cases YOKOGAWA does not guarantee the quality performance function and safety of product When installing protection and or safety circuits such as lightning protection devices and equipment for the product and control system or designing or installing separate protection and or safety circuits for fool proof design and fail safe design of the processes and lines that use the product and the control system the user should implement these using additional devices and equipment If you are replacing parts or consumable items of the product make sure to use parts specified by YOKOGAWA This product is not designed or manufactured to be used in critical applications that directly affect or threaten human
172. ess Avoid bringing instruments that produce magnetic fields or magnets near this instrument Using the instrument near a strong magnetic field source can cause measurement errors Installation Procedures CAUTION When attaching the instrument to DIN rails use metal plates at least 2 mm thick in three places to secure the unit and prevent it from falling The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit can be used on the desktop placed on a floor rack mounted or panel mounted In all cases be sure to install the instrument in a vertical position 2 2 IM MW100 01E 2 2 Installation Placing on a Desktop or on the Floor Since each module has feet you can attach the necessary modules to the base plate allowing the unit to be placed vertically For the procedure for attaching the modules see the next page Bui pue uonejeisul Hu Functional ground terminal screw Attaching to DIN Rails By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate as in the figure below you can rack mount or panel mount the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Attachment of the DIN rail mount bracket to Attachment of the base plate to the DIN rail the base plate Latch lever press to release from the DIN rail Attachment screws M3 DIN rail mount bracket DIN rail mount bracket
173. essing blinking Measuring IM MW100 01E 1 9 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B5 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Switches and Keys Connectors The MW100 has the following switches and keys Some are included with options Start and Stop keys User function key 1 User function key 2 Dip switch 1 Dip switch 2 Terminator switch C3 option Power switch User Function Keys Actions set up using the Event Action function can be executed by pressing the user function keys on the front panel of the MW100 The keys are assigned as follows by default Key Display Action User function key 1 USER1 Write to setting values file User function key 2 USER2 Load setting values file Dip Switch 1 Used to initialize the MW100 settings and for other functions Normal operation ON 123245867 8 Initialization of IP addresses and other settings ON 123 4 5 67 8 Fixed IP address 192 168 0 10 ON 123 45 67 8 Dip Switch 2 Turn all switches ON for normal operation If the switches are set differently the instrument may not function correctly Tli 458 Key Lock Function You can apply a lock to the functions of the Start Stop and user function keys The lock prevents inadvertent execution of functions The MW100 can c
174. esults From the relationship in equation 1 if 200 N is applied it means that an output of 0 985 mV V 0 985 2000 1970 uSTR is obtained In other words for each 1N 1970 uSTR 200N 9 85 uSTR N of output results Therefore the scaling settings are entered as follows When Measuring at 50 to 150 N Scale minimum 50 set to Smin Scale maximum 150 units N set to Smax therefore Span minimum 50 x 9 85 uSTR N 492 5 uSTR Span maximum 150 x 9 85 1477 5 uSTR would be appropriate settings Hence the measuring range is 2000 uSTR Generally the range is as follows Using the symbols explained up to now after setting the minimum and maximum scale we can describe the minimum and maximum values of span as Min value of span K mV V x 2000 Y unit x Smin uSTR Max value of span K mV V x 2000 Y unit x Smax uSTR IM MW100 01E 1 33 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 7 Functions of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module When the Calibration Coefficient is Known An example using a displacement gauge provides an explanation Rated input 20 mm e Calibration coefficient 0 003998 mm 1 u V V Basically if you can convert the calibration coefficient to the rated output mentioned in When Rated Input and Rated Output Are Known the previous equation can be used Using equation 1 1 uV V 0 001 mV V 0 001 x 2000 uSTR 2 uSTR therefore the rated output with this sensor when 20 mm is input
175. ettings 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt Transmission Output Control 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list 3 Select ON or OFF in the Output list of the channel number you wish to set 4 Click the Apply button Starts transmission output on channels set to ON Channel List 001 010 No Output oor fon s oz orr pos forr pos forre por forr s pos or sd po fore sd Apply 3 26 IM MW100 01E 3 10 Event Action Settings By linking the Event function and Action function you can control the operations of the MW100 Setting Mode 1 From the top screen click System Setting gt Event Action Setting 2 Select the number group of the Event Action you wish to set from the list Selecting the Event Type 1 Select the event event function type in the Event list of the number you wish to set Depending on this setting the Channel box may become enabled meaning that the settings in steps 2 and 3 are required 2 In the Channel box enter the number channel number relay number etc for the event selected in the event type selection in step 1 3 Ifthe event type is ALARM CH select the alarm level number for the event in the Channel box Selecting the Event Detection Method Select the event detection method from the Detection list The action action function that can be selected varies depending on the item selected for the detection method
176. eys 1 Select the main unit key you wish to operate from the Key Operation list 2 Click the Apply button The same operation takes place as if you had pressed the main unit key Checking the Alarm Status 1 Select the Alarm Acknowledge check box 2 Click the Apply button Held alarms are cleared Clearing the Error Display 1 Select the Error Display check box 2 Click the Apply button Clears the error number displayed in the 7 segment LED Executing Strain Initial Balancing 1 Select the initial balance execution method from the Strain Initial Balancing list 2 Click the Apply button Initial balancing is executed on the channel selected in the strain input settings in the channel settings Execute Communication Test 1 Select the item you wish to test from the Communication Test list 2 Click the Apply button The test is executed Top System Setting Status Information Status Information Mode Kind Status Operation Measurement STOP START z vara STOP zi Recording sroe gt Alarm Waiting Alarm ACK Status Control Key Operation USERT s Alarm Acknowledge IV Execute Error Display Iv Clear Strain Initial Balancing RESET z Communication Test SMTP 1 Apply 3 12 IM MW100 01E 3 4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured Setting Mode Computed Data This is an explanation of measurement settings MATH settings recording settings and thinning set
177. f the Main Module Recording Start Operation The following three operations for starting of recording to the CF card are available Type Notation Operation None OFF Does not record Direct DIRECT Starts recording at the same time as recording to the internal memory starts Trigger TRIGGER Enters trigger wait mode when recording starts Recording is started after an event occurs There are no triggers for recording of thinned data Pretrigger Function When selecting Trigger a pre trigger can be set in units of ten percent of the data length Writing starts simultaneously with recording and after a trigger event occurs the data remaining after removal of the pretrigger data is written Saving Settings MW100 setting values can be saved The contents that are saved are as follows Range alarm and MATH related settings Media related settings Communication related settings Other settings However when settings are loaded onto the MW100 the IP address subnet mask default gateway host name and domain name are not loaded Format Initializes the CF Card Daylight saving time Timer Match Time The internal clock is updated every specified month week day and time The Event Action function can be started according to timer settings The following two timers are available Type Notation Description Relative Time Timer RELATIVE Time up occurs at the specified time interval
178. failure is restored after appended during recovery from the failure The data after recovery is recorded continuously to newly created files Internal Backup Memory Function overview Using the main unit s internal backup memory SRAM even upon a power failure data before the failure is saved to CF card without loss Backup memory capacity For measured and computed values 1 25 MB For thinned values 256 KB Saving Settings Saves settings to CF card Saving loading Set by user function key on the main unit or by communication input From the function keys only the SETTING PNL file can be loaded Saved settings All settings are saved File creation location CONFIG folder on the CF card Created file name From the user function keys SETTING PNL From communication commands or the browser a name can be set with the PNL extension 5 8 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Illuminated Indicates measuring recording alarm occurrence computing and receiving data by serial communications Blinking Recording or computation in progress MW 100 Data Acquisition Unit status display Unit number error occurrence time power ON self check in progress key lock ON processing Ethernet communication status LINK ACT Display Status LED Two digit 7 segment LED Ethernet port LED Communication Ethernet Port Interface Connector type Main protocols Ethernet 10BASE T RJ 45 FTP SMTP SNTP DHCP DNS H
179. g range ut setting the scale sssssssseeeeeeeeneenne Settings EOTS eiue idee ea eee t eee doceo o DU signal names single screen slide zone SMTP client function aN D E EER EA OREGON RE SNTP fUnction sainia standard accessories sssssssssseeeee standard protocol ecrit tenes standards compliance starting computation sesseeeeeeees starting measurement ssssssssssseeeneeenee starting recording status status bar E status indicators asonante aeania status information sssssssssseeeeneenenennne Steady output operation Stop bit ee stopping computation Stopping measurement ssssssssseseeeeneenee Stopping recording sssssseseseeeeneeennne strain input style number sssesesesss 5 2 5 25 5 29 5 33 5 37 5 40 5 41 5 43 5 46 Suffix CODE 5 2 dere ber exe Dri a Eaa d gn i supply voltage range used sssssseee supported external media Switches and keys ssssseeeeeeneee synchronization between channels ss 1 12 synchronization between modules 1 12 System configuration System error notification SYSUCM SIONS 5er eerie tee e n He ER Hes System information esessssssseeeeeeene nen
180. g the main module and input output modules There are six types of base plates available connecting from one to six input output modules By attaching DIN rail mounting brackets to the base plate you can rack mount or panel mount the MW100 main unit 1 6 IM MW100 01E 1 1 System Overview PC Software The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit comes with the MW100 Viewer software program that allows users to view measured data acquired by the MW100 MW100 Viewer consists of the three software components described below For a detailed description of the functions of these software components see the MW100 Viewer software user s manual IM MW180 01E Address Setting Software Sets the IP address on the MW100 This software is used when setting an IP address for the first time or if the current IP address needs to be changed Viewer Software Enables you to 1 display measured and computed data that has been stored 2 read values and perform computation over an area using cursors and 3 convert the measured and computed data into various file formats such as Excel Calibration Software This software is used to calibrate the input output modules connected to the MW100 CE atx f e Wen Help M Fie Wen Heb Serio ELE II KE MAC Adres ants min Serio EM am me nraaaggdas o IM MW100 01E 1 7 suonounJ Jo uoneuejdxa3 B 1 2 MW100
181. h isolation sleeves for 4 mm screws for the power cord and protective ground cord terminals 4 Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw og Mvv1 DATA ACQUISITION UNIT Power supply Power cord terminal cover Protective Power cord grounding cord Protective grounding cord 2 18 IM MW100 01E 2 5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Wiring the Power Supply Terminal Power Supply Cord Basic Specification 2M or 3W When using an AC adapter for the power supply A To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF Use the power cord supplied by Yokogawa with the instrument e Check that the supply voltage matches the rated voltage of the AC adapter before connecting the power cord During periods of extended non use remove the AC adapter s power cord from the AC outlet Do not use an AC adapter model 772075 other than the one supplied by YOKOGAWA Nothing should be placed on top of the AC adapter power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself
182. h res 0 0000 to 6 0000 V t 0 0596 of rdg 20 digits 0 1 of rdg 100 digits 100uV R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 4 C S Except 0 to 100 C 3 7 C 100 to Except 0 to 100 C 10 C 100 to 300 C 1 5 C for R and S 300 C 5 C for R and S B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 400 to 600 C 2 C less than 400 to 600 C 7 C less than 400 C not guaranteed for B 400 C not guaranteed for B 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 3 5 C K1 200 0 to 1370 0 C Except 200 C to 100 C Except 200 C to 100 C o 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 6 C 0 1 C E 200 0 to 800 0 C J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 5 C 0 1 of rdg 2 5 C e T 200 0 to 400 0 C Except 200 C to 100 C Except 200 C to 100 C 5 E 200 0 to 900 0 C 0 0596 of rdg 0 7 C for J and L 0 1 of rdg 5 C for J and L 9 U 200 0 to 400 0 C E N3 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 196 of rdg 3 5 C 2r w 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 05 of rdg 1 C 0 1 of rdg 7 C 8 g KPvsAu7Fe 0 0 to 300 0K 0 05 of rdg 0 7K 0 1 of rdg 3 5K 0 1K 2 0 05 of rdg 2 5 C 0 1 of rdg 12 C 59 PR40 20 0 0 to 1900 0 C Except 300 to 700 C 6 C Except 300 to 700 C 25 C less than 300 C not guaranteed less than 300 C not guaranteed NiNiMo 0 0 to1310 0 C 0 05 of rdg 0 7 C 0 1 of rdg 2 7 C 0 05 of rdg 2 C 0 1 of rdg 7 C WRe3 25 0 0 to 2400
183. he amount of available space on the card Also you can check system information and initialize settings in the same screen From the top screen click System Setting System Information Checking the Free Disk Space The amount of used and total space is displayed in the Capacity box under Media Information Formatting 1 Select the Format check box under Media Information 2 Click the Initialize button to initialize the CF card Checking System Information and Initializing You can view the model name serial number installed options firmware version and WEB software version in the corresponding display boxes Also you can initialize system settings For details see section 4 6 Initializing the System 1 Selectthe initialization level from the Initialization Level list 2 Click the Initialize button to initialize the system settings Top gt System Setting gt System Information System Information Model mmo Serial No pre98 Option MATHDEGFRS 4220ST Version 5300 Web Version o0 Initializing Level OFF z Media Information Capacity 123654 124906 K byte free Format D Execute Initialize Daylight saving Time Setting 1 From the top screen click System Setting gt Daylight Saving Time Setting 2 Selectthe Daylight Saving Time check box The Summer time and Winter time function is enabled 3 Select a starting month week and day of the week for the start of Summer time in the Start Time b
184. ic characters can be input Enter the sender mail address in the Sender box Enter the recipient address in the Recipient 1 box Enter the address for Recipient 2 in the same manner You can specify multiple addresses for each recipient Separate each address with a space You do not have to set both recipients Use up to 150 alphanumeric characters To set up alarm notification select an address for alarm notification in the Alarm Notification list 1_2 sends notification to both recipient 1 and 2 Enter an alarm notification channel in the Alarm Channel Set box under Alarm Notification To add instantaneous values select the Instantaneous Data check box Specify channel numbers by delimiting them with dots as in 001 003 005 or specify a range as in 004 008 IM MW100 01E 3 33 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 14 Network Utility Settings 10 11 12 13 To set up notification of data file creation select a notification address in the File Creation Notification list In the same manner as in step 7 set Media Alarm Notification Power Failure Notification and System Error Notification To set up Periodic Report notification select an address for notification in the Periodic Report list Select transmission interval time from the Interval box under Periodic Report Enter a reference time for the send interval in the Time box under Periodic Report To add instantaneous values select the Instantaneous Data check box
185. imit 10000 10 0 to 500 0 Lower limit 100 Upper limit 5000 6 000 to 4 500 Lower limit 6000 Upper limit 4500 Example of a filled in screen Cale Ref Scale Unit Ch Lower Upper DP scaE s fo 10000 2s scare zll roo 5000 fal feae feon fee RA Wace 1 IM MW100 01E 3 29 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 13 Starting and Stopping Measurement Computation and Recording This is an explanation of the procedure for starting and stopping measurement computation and recording These operations can be performed by pressing keys on the MW100 main module or from a browser Starting and stopping of measurement computation and recording must be performed one at a time Starting and Stopping Measurement Using Main Module Keys e Starting Measurement While measurement is stopped briefly press the START key Measurement starts and the unit switches to Measurement mode Stopping Measurement While recording and computation are stopped briefly press the STOP key Measurement stops and the unit switches to Setting mode Using a Browser Starting Measurement In the Status table in the top screen select START from the Operation list under the Measurement item Measurement starts and the unit switches to Measurement mode Stopping Measurement In the Status table in the top screen select STOP from the Operation list under the Measurement item Measurement stops and the unit sw
186. imultaneously When setting the start operation to time up on the timer match time or user function key then computation start stop recording start stop and flag input 0 1 repeat alternately Digital input information alarm occurrence relay output internal timer time up match time user function key recording start and others Recording start stop activate trigger computation start stop reset clear reset timer alarm ACK flag input write message read write settings Read write setting value file can be performed with user function key Execute from Event Action setting number 1 The action that is performed is of the last event that is executed 6 Two Relative timer and Absolute timer Repeats time up every specified time interval Time interval can be set in 1 minute intervals Setting range is 00 days 00 hours 00 min to 31 days 23 hours 59 minutes If the setting of the relative timer is changed or in the event of a power failure the timer is reset to 0 and starts again If the clock is changed the timer time is not adjusted Using the specified reference time as a standard repeats the time up every specified time interval Reference time set in one minute intervals in the range of 00 hours 00 min to 23 hours 59 minutes Time intervals 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 min 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 24 h When the power fails or the clock is changed and the timeup time is exceeded the time up is not a
187. in and remove the CF card from the slot Note Ifthe eject lever is difficult to push with your finger use the tip of a pen or other pointed object Do not close the slot cover by force when the eject lever is out Doing so can damage the CF card slot When not using the eject lever push the lever in so that the slot cover can be closed IM MW100 01E 2 31 Bundi pue uonejeisul s Chapter 3 Setting and Data Acquisition 3 4 Connection Environment This section explains the environment in which the MW100 is connected including requirements for the PC system browser and plug in software and setting screens This chapter focuses on settings entered with the browser For information about communication commands see the Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E PC System Requirements Browser Installing Java PCHardware Intel Pentium Il 400 MHz CPU or higher Pentium IIl 1 GHz or higher recommended and at least 256 MB of memory 512 MB or more recommended OS Operating System Windows 2000 or Windows XP recommended required Display XGA 1024 x 768 resolution or better and capable of displaying 65535 or more colors Ethernet Port An Ethernet port compatible with the OS requires 10BASE T or 100BASE TX The following browser is required for entry of settings on the MW100 Internet Explorer 5 0 or later recommended Java is required for entering settings using a browser JRE Java run
188. in the United States and or other countries CompactFlash is a registered trademark of Sundisk Corporation in the USA and licensed from the CFA Compact Flash Association For purposes of this manual the and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names Company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders 1st Edition June 2005 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM MW100 01E Safety Precautions About This Manual Please pass this manual to the end user Read this manual thoroughly and have a clear understanding of the product before operation This manual explains the functions of the product It does not guarantee that the product will suit a particular purpose of the user Under absolutely no circumstances may the contents of this manual be transcribed or copied in part or in whole without permission The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors or omissions please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Precautions Related to the Protection Safety and Alteration of the Product The following safety symbols are used on the product and in this manual N Danger Refer to the us
189. ing an Address Select an address from the list below This is valid for the RS 422A 485 interface and Modbus protocol 1 to 32 for dedicated protocol 1 to 247 for Modbus protocol Selecting the Standard Protocol Select NORMAL when performing communications using the Standard RS 232 or RS 422A 485 protocol IM MW100 01E 2 27 Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit The technical Information described below is available as reference material on measures against noise For information on obtaining a copy contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Noise Interference on Recorder TI 4D5B1 80E Describes the fundamentals concerning noise and its countermeasures in two parts basic edition and application edition MX100 Performance Specifications TI 04M08B01 00E This describes in detail the noise rejection characteristics and functions that are unique to the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit This section briefly describes the integrating A D converter and the first order lag filter that the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit employs as measures against noise Integrating A D Converter MW100 input modules employ integrating A D converters for converting the measured analog signals into digital signals The integrating A D converter integrates the measured values at the specified time width If the specified time spacing matches the period of the signal you wish to reject the signal is rejec
190. istance This module has built in termination resistance When using multi drop connections including point to point connections for the outermost unit turn terminator switch ON Turn it OFF for units in the middle Also turn ON termination resistance for the connected upstream device see the manual of the upstream device When using a converter turn ON its termination resistance The recommended converters have built in termination resistance 2 24 IM MW100 01E 2 8 Connecting the RS 232 Interface C2 Option Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names Connector Pin Assignments 9 3 4 5 zr Oo O LS 1 X C 6789 2 Y x Signal Names Corresponding to Connector Pins The following table shows signal names for the RS 232 JIS and ITU T standards Pin Signal Name Notation Meaning JIS ITU T RS 232 2 RD 104 BB RXD Receive data Input signal to the instrument 3 SD 103 BA TXD Transmitted data Output signal from the instrument 5 SG 102 AB GND Signal ground The signal ground 7 RS 105 CA RTS Requesttosend The handshaking signal when receiving data from the computer and output signal from the instrument 8 CS 106 CB CTS Clear to send The handshaking signal when receiving data from the computer and input signal to the instrument Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are not used Handshaking One of the following four methods in the table
191. istance DC voltage thermocouple 2 kQ or less RTD 50 Q 100 Q types 10 Q per line or less RTD10 Q 25 types 1 Q per line or less Thermocouple burnout Superposed electric current system detection within the thermocouple range detection ON OFF possible Up Down setting is possible current approximately 100 nA 2 k or less normal 10 MQ or more disconnected Effect on measurement accuracy 15uV or less not including effect of signal source resistance Parallel capacity during RTD 0 01uF or less Power consumption Approx 3 W External dimensions Approx 57 W x 181 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5 kg Terminal type Clamp detachable per channel Applicable wire size 0 2 to 2 5 mm AWG24 to 12 IM MW100 01E 5 27 uoneoyioedg B 5 4 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Effects of Operating Conditions The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16 67 ms or more Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power up Effects of ambient temperature The effect received by changes in 10 C increments of the ambient temperature is 0 05 of rdg 0 05 of range or less However for Cu10 Q 0 296 of range 1 digit Effects of power fluctuation Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V Effects of magnetic field The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC 50 60 Hz 400 A m is 0 1 of
192. itches to Setting mode Starting and Stopping Computation This function is enabled when the MATH function M1 option is installed You can use the function when MATH channels are set Using Main Module Keys Computation Start While recording is stopped and during measurement briefly press the START key Computation starts Computation Stop During computation and while recording is stopped briefly press the STOP key Computation stops Using a Browser The main module can be switched to Measurement mode This is done while recording is stopped Starting Computation 1 From the top screen click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item 2 Click the Start computation icon Computation starts Stopping Computation 1 From the top screen click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item 2 Click the Stop computation icon Computation stops For information about the operation screen see section 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings 3 30 IM MW100 01E 3 13 Starting and Stopping Measurement Computation and Recording Starting and Stopping Recording Using Main Module Keys Starting Recording During measurement hold down the START key for two or more seconds Recording starts Stopping Recording During recording hold down the STOP key for two or more seconds Recording stops Using a Browser The main module can be switched to Measurement mode Starting Recording 1 F
193. k the contents before operating the instrument If some of the contents are not correct or if any items are missing or damaged contact the dealer from whom you purchased them Checking the Model and Suffix Code Check the model and suffix code on the name plate indicated in the figure below Main module Styl Input Output module ty 2 DAQMASTER number A Suffix code Instrument 3 s CCE P amp exxg number L Instrument number MAC address Suffix code Model Base plate o ws o o o 5 E O E 9 L 2 Instrument number Model Note When contacting the dealer from which you purchased the instrument please give them the NO instrument number on the name plate Main Module Model Suffix Code Description MW100 Main module Manual language E English comes with an English manual Supply voltage 1 100 VAC 240 VAC 2 12 VDC 28VDC with AC adapter 3 12 VDC 28VDC without AC adapter Power supply and power cord D AC power 3 pin inlet UL CSA Standard power cord DC power Screw terminal UL CSA cable for AC adapter F AC power 3 pin inlet VDE Standard power cord DC power Screw terminal VDE cable for AC adapter R AC power 3 pin inlet SAA Standard power cord DC power Screw terminal SAA cable for AC adapter Q AC power 3 pin inlet B
194. led while opening file Files may have been damaged Take appropriate action for power failure E344 Some or all data prior to power outage could not Do not change the CF card during a power failure be recovered E345 Could not restart recording after recovery from Perform the record start operation power outage E346 Recording could not be started due to power Perform the re recording start operation outage Take appropriate action for power failure May occur in the MW100 internal processing during an abnormality Communication Command Error The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E401 Command string too long Keep the command within 2047 Bytes from first character to terminator E402 Too many commands enumerated Set the number of enumerated commands within 99 E403 Invalid type of commands enumerated Send the commands without enumerating them E404 Invalid command Confirm the command name E405 Not allowed to execute this command Login at a level that allows execution of this command E406 Cannot execute due to different operation mode Switch to a mode that allows execution of this command E407 Invalid number
195. line O KO EIKO i Minus wiring IM MW100 01E 2 19 Bui pue uoneyyersul s 2 5 Connecting the Power Supply and Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF When Using a DC Power Supply AN To prevent the possibility of electric shock when wiring confirm that the power supply source is turned OFF To avoid electric shock or fire use electric wires having a cross sectional area of 0 3 mm AWG 22 or more m Check that the power supply and the power switch of the main module is OFF Loosen the screw fixing the power supply terminal cover of the main module in place and open the power supply terminal cover Co Following the wiring diagram see When Using an AC Adapter in this section wire the plus minus wires from the DC power supply and the protective grounding wire to the power supply terminal A Close the power supply terminal cover and secure it with the screw Use a power supply that meets the conditions indicated below Item Specifications Rated supply voltage 12 to 28 VDC Supply voltage range used DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC Maximum power consumption Up to approximately 35 VA maximum when six modules are used Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF Pressing the Ud side of the power switch turns the instrument ON Pressing the O side turns the instrument OFF When turned ON the 7 segment LED see section 1 3 Fu
196. lized and not saved Maximum no saved Shown in the table below If the number is exceeded old logs are overwritten Item Maximum no saved Operation log 256 Error log 50 Message summary 50 Communication log 200 FTP client log 50 SNTP client log 50 SNTP client log 50 DHCP client log 50 FTP server log 50 HTTP server log 50 Modbus master log 50 Modbus client log 50 Computation status 1 Recording status 1 Maximum no displayed Item Maximum no displayed Modbus client connection command 100 Modbus client connection status 10 Modbus master command 100 Modbus master connection status 247 Strain initial balance result 60 Event Action Function By linking the Event function and Action function you can control the operations of the main unit Number of settings 30 IM MW100 01E 5 21 uoneoyioedg eo 5 2 Main Module Specifications Event operation Event function Action function Execution sequence Internal Timer No of timers Types of timers Relative time timer Absolute time timer Match Time No of match times Match time function Initializing Settings Edge Execute an operation once according to changes in events Level Continue operation as long as the condition continues MATH operation start recording operation start flag input enabled The same start function cannot be set to edge start or multiple settings s
197. low pass filter When the measurement interval is 100 ms measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency noise is not rejected In such cases set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more For DC power set to 20 ms When synchronizing time by SNTP the integral time is set to 100 ms Also in this case noise of 10 Hz and its integer multiples is rejected N o Gauge connection method 1 gauge 2 or 3 wire systems opposing 2 gauge adjacent 2 or 4 gauge With clamp terminals set on a channel basis with switches Applicable gauge resistance 100 to 1000 Q 120 Q for B12 350 Q built in resistance for B35 Bridge voltage Fixed at 2 VDC Accuracy 5 compensated with internal Cal Applicable gauge factor Fixed at 2 0 Gauge factor can be compensated with the scaling function Balance adjustment Automatic digital calculation methods Balance adjustment range 10000 ustrain 1 gauge method conversion Balance adjustment accuracy The measurement accuracy or less Resistance accuracy for bridge 0 01 5ppm C Input resistance 1 MQ or more IM MW100 01E 5 37 5 7 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Specifications Allowable wiring resistance 100 Q or less Effect of wiring resistance NDIS 50 ppm of rdg Q when using remote sensing wire Does not compensate for clamp wiring resistance Depends on the gauge resistance Allowable input voltage x10 VDC between H L continuous Allowable common mode v
198. lple 5 KB file size Denotes 1024 K Example 5 MB Denotes 1024 M Example 2 GB Safety Markings The following markings are used in this manual AN CAUTION Note Refer to corresponding location on the instrument This symbol appears on dangerous locations on the instrument which require special instructions for proper handling or use The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the manual to identify those instructions Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious injury or death to the user and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user s data and precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences Calls attention to information that is important for proper operation of the instrument IM MW100 01E Contents Chapter 1 Safety Precautions re iiec als eii at ud ii Checking the Contents of the Package sesssssessesseeeeeeneneee nennen nennen nnne nenne iv Conventions Used in This Manual ssseseeeeeeeneeneeneneneee nennen nennen nnne nnne nnns ix Explanation of Functions 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 System OVvetvieW 5 coule ed nitet D D RO ERAS 1 1 MW100 Data Acquisition Unit seeeseeennnnnm emere 1 1 System Configuration eite Ro DERE ER ERR RERO ESR 1 1 Main Modu le
199. lt value Enter the correct IP address T The default value cannot be used to make the connection There is a problem in the network configuration Check that the IP address subnet mask and default n gateway settings on the MW100 are correct See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual The Calibrator cannot connect to the MW100 Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section Attempting to make multiple connections Exit all other software programs 4 8 See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual The connected input output module is not detected Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section Module connection or module startup error Turn OFF the power Detach the input output module 2 5 Attached the module while the power was ON once and attach it again Carried out an incorrect calibration Recalibrate 4 3 See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual 4 10 IM MW100 01E 4 3 Troubleshooting The measured value is not correct Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section The input wiring is not correct Check the input wiring 2 4 The measured value is at Over or Over Change to an appropriate setting 3 5 The measurement range setting and input range do not match The temperature error is large or is unstable Change to the correct setting 3 5 The TC type setting and the type actually connected
200. lues send receive measured and computed values 5 10 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications Communication Input Function All settings on the main unit other than dip switch operation can be performed with communication commands For information about communication commands see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Communication Output Function The following information about the main unit can be output using communication commands For information about communication commands see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Item Description Measured value Outputs most recent measured value Computed value Outputs most recent computed value Output value Outputs most recent output value Units decimal place Outputs the units and decimal place for measured and computed values Measured and computed value Outputs the measured and computed values from the FIFO FIFO data buffer Thinned values FIFO data Outputs the thinned values from the FIFO buffer Alarm summary Outputs the alarm summary Message summary Outputs the message summary Data acquisition log Outputs the data acquisition log Computation status Outputs the MATH status Recording status Outputs the recording status Operation log Outputs the key operation log Communication log Outputs the communication log FTP log Outputs the FTP operation log
201. ly 1 second Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature measurements using thermocouples If this happens make the measurement interval longer or use the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module 3 For DC power set to 20 ms 4 When synchronizing time by SNTP the integral time is set to 36 67 ms Also in this case noise of 50 Hz 60 Hz and their integer multiples is rejected 5 When synchronizing time by SNTP the integral time is set to 100 ms Also in this case noise of 10 Hz and its integer multiples is rejected Reference junction compensation Switch external internal by channel includes remote RJC function 5 30 IM MW100 01E 5 5 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Reference junction compensation accuracy When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 C and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced Type R S W 1 C Type K J E T N L U TXK 0 5 C Type N AWG14 PLATINEL NiNiMo WRe3 25 W WRe26 1 C Note Type B and PR40 20 internal RUC is fixed at 0 C Maximum input voltage DC voltage at 1 V range or less TC RTC and DI contact x10 VDC continuous Other measurement ranges 120 VDC continuous Normal mode voltage DC voltage TC DI LEVEL 1 2 times the range rating or less 50 60 Hz peak value including the signal component RTD 100 Q 50 mVpeak RTD 10 Q 25 Q 50 10
202. mVpeak Normal mode rejection ratio For integration time of 16 67 ms or more 40 dB or more 50 60 Hz x 0 196 For integration time of 1 67 ms 50 60 Hz is not rejected The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows Common mode voltage 600 VACrms 50 60 Hz reinforced double insulation Common mode rejection ratio 50 60 Hz 0 196 500 Q unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground The RTD and resistance ranges indicate the voltage conversion value when current flows When the integration time is 16 67 ms or more 120 dB or more When the integration time is 1 67 ms 80 dB or more Common mode voltage between channels 120 VACrms 50 60 Hz Noise rejection Rejection by the integrating A D converter and the use of low pass filters Input resistance For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range 10 MQ or less For DC voltage 2 V range or higher Approx 1 MQ Insulation resistance Between input and ground 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Input bias current 10 nA or less except for burnout setting Withstand Voltage 1000 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between input terminals 3700 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal Input signal source resistance DC voltage thermocouple 2 kQ or less RTD 50 Q 100 Q types 10 Q per line or less RTD 10 Q 25 Q types 1 Q per line or less Thermocouple burnout Detection at a specified detection interval per me
203. mality does not recover Operation upon errors Command output Recover after internal communication If the error recovery time is 10 s or error more operation upon error operation upon power ON gt command output If the error recovery time is within 10 S operation upon startup command output CPU abnormality does not recover Operation upon errors Executed by command output from the PC after recovering from the error IM MW100 01E 1 41 1 12 Functions of the 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module This module has ten contact signal outputs that are based on alarm output settings and output settings from the PC Output Types The following types output factors are available Type Notation Description Alarm ALARM Measurement and computation channels Command COM Command DO operation Media MEDIA When the remaining space on the CF card reaches the specified time Fail FAIL When an abnormality occurs on the CPU of the MW100 main module Error ERROR When an error is detected on the MW100 Output Update Interval The output is updated at 100 ms intervals It is not synchronized to the measurement interval Relay Excitation State Hold Operation You can select whether or not to energize the output relays upon output The excitation status selection differs depending on the output type Excitation Notation Description Status Energize ENERG Energize when relay output is O
204. mp terminals 772067 1 Dedicated to the MX110 V4R M06 11 Plate with clamp terminals 772068 1 Dedicated to the MX112 B12 M04 Built in bridge 120 Q 12 Plate with clamp terminals 772069 1 Dedicated to the MX112 B35 M04 Built in bridge 350 Q 772082 is only applicable between the MX110 UNV M10 and the screw terminal 772061 the MX115 D05 H10 and the screw terminal 772061 and the MX115 D24 H10 and the screw terminal 772061 772068 is only applicable to MX112 B35 M04 772069 is only applicable to MX112 B12 M04 IM MW100 01E vii Checking the Contents of the Package Shunt resistor No Name Model Minimum Q ty Note 13 Shunt resistor 438920 1 Resistance 250 Q 0 1 for the clamp terminal 14 Shunt resistor 438921 1 Resistance 100 Q 0 1 for the clamp terminal 15 Shunt resistor 438922 1 Resistance 10 Q 0 1 16 Shunt resistor 415920 1 Resistance 250 Q 0 1 17 Shunt resistor 415921 1 Resistance 100 Q 0 1 18 Shunt resistor 415922 1 Resistance 10 Q 0 1 Memory card No Name Model Minimum Q ty Note 19 Adapter for 772090 1 CompactFlash card 20 CompactFlash card 772091 1 128MB 21 CompactFlash card 772092 1 256MB 22 CompactFlash card 772093 1 512MB 23 CompactFlash card 772094 1 1GB Operating temperature range 40 to 85 C viii IM MW100 01E Conventions Used in This Manual Unit k K M G Denotes 1000 Denotes 1024 Exam
205. n 2 Enter the time in minutes until the timeout in the Timeout box Server List Settings 1 Touse a server turn it ON in the Action box of the corresponding server name 2 Enter the port number used by the server in the Port box Normally you can use the default setting Click the Apply button TCP Keep Alive M Enable Application Timeout C Enable Timeout min Server List Server Action Port MODBUS ON r j po2 FTP ON Eff HTTP ON mfo SNTP ON wj i23 GENE ON mj 4318 DIAG ON rj s217 Apply IM MW100 01E 3 35 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 15 Saving and Loading Setup Data You can save and load MW100 main unit settings Saving and Loading Setup Data From the top screen click System Setting Save Load Setup Data Saving Settings 1 Select SAVE in the Operation list 2 Enterafile name in the File Name box then click the Save Load button The extension cannot be input it is fixed at PNL If you enter an existing file name the existing file is overwritten Loading Settings 1 Select LOAD in the Operation list 2 Enter a file name in the File box then click the Save Load button Top gt System Setting gt Save Load Setup Data Setup File Operation SAVE v File Name setting Save Load Setup Data Save Conditions 1 From the top screen click System Setting gt Save Option Setting Select the Channel Setting check box to save Select the Recording Setting check box to save Select the Communication
206. n cause discoloring or deformation Do not bring charged objects near the signal terminals Doing so can lead to malfunction Do not pour volatile agents on the MW100 or leave it in contact with rubber or PVC products for an extended time Doing so can lead to malfunction Donotapply shock to the instrument When not in use make sure to turn OFF the power fthere are any symptoms of trouble such as smoke strange orders or strange sounds coming from the instrument immediately turn OFF the power and shut off the power supply Contact your dealer immediately Handle the power cord correctly Nothing should be placed on top of the power cord The power cord should also be kept away from any heat sources When unplugging the power cord from the outlet never pull by the cord itself Always hold and pull by the plug If the cord is damaged contact your dealer for replacement When ordering see page vi for the power cord part number IM MW100 01E Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 2 Installation Installation Location Install the instrument indoors in the following locations In temperatures of 20 to 60 C If the ambient temperature is 20 to 40 C place the instrument in a location where the humidity is 20 to 80 RH For 40 to 50 C the humidity should be 10 to 50 For 50 to 60 C the humidity should be 5 to 3096 However no condensation should be present Also note that the temperature range of certain modules i
207. n ner eerte USERZONG eos Ce n EH Ce OH po C Edd V Page VE TUER 3 21 viewer SOftWALe 1 esci reed hene ream nenas 1 7 Mel p saeenae 3 17 W Page wiring digital input modules eene 2 14 wiring procedures eeseeeeeeeennen en 2 10 wiring with the analog output module 2 15 wiring with the digital output module 2 16 wiring with the PWM output module ee 2 15 X Page XON XON mm Eea 2 26 Index 4 IM MW100 01E
208. n of the CF card and power ON OFF status is saved in text format to a log file with the name RECORDLG TXT For information about log statuses and messages see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E Information Saved to the Log File When power is turned OFF or ON When CF card is inserted or ejected When CF card is formatted Upon recording stop or start etc File creation or deletion Triggers Time synchronization Errors Log saving Example of a Log File Yokogawa Date 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 05 03 25 gt gt Bo BO BNOBNOI ooo0o2o0co0 05 01 01 00 05 03 25 09 05 03 25 10 200 00 00 002 00 00 00 240 241 214 00 58 00 01 13 03 00 05 05 05 06 15 15 35 125 26 DAOMASTER MW100 Time Status Powe Form Crea Reco Mode E at te rd 100ms LOC Crea Crea Crea Reco Crea Crea Hs te te te rd te ce Record Info Message on ok DATA0033 start 1 rotate i 1H 12cells 1409KB 32510100 32510101 32510102 stop 1 ALARMLG RECORDLG Time indicating when settings were initialized r Time after internal clock is reset Recording starts r Data file creation Recording stops Newest information Termination mark When settings are initialized the MW100 initial time value of 2005 01 01 00 00 00 is set After
209. n the Input Value box For the range of available communication input values see chapter 5 Specifications 4 Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt COM Input Channel Setting EE coni covo 12345 f 2345E 5 ii Ap 3 lt 3 20 IM MW100 01E 3 7 Setting Alarms You can set the alarm type alarm value hysteresis and output operation For information about alarm types and other parameters see section 1 3 Functions of the Main Module During recording only values can be changed Setting Mode Meas Mode Alarm Setting AI DI You can set measurement channel alarms 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt Alarm Setting AI DI 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Alarm Settings 1 Select the alarm type from the Level list 2 Enteran alarm value in the Value box 3 Entera hysteresis value in the Hysteresis box Output Settings 1 Turn output ON OFF in the Action box 2 Enteran alarm output channel in the Relay box Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Top gt Channel Setting gt Alarm Setting AUDI ee No Level Value Hysteresis Action Relay ae 2 E si es m a E Alarm Setting MATH You c
210. nctions of the Main Module illuminates When the self check and other processes are complete the unit number is displayed Note Before turning the power ON check that the modules are attached correctly and that the power cord is connected correctly If the 7 segment LED does not illuminate even if the power switch is turned ON turn OFF the power switch then check the items below If the condition does not change when turning ON the power even after checking those items it is probably a malfunction Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs Thatthe power cord is plugged in properly Thatthe power supply voltage is within the allowable voltage range specified in this section If the 7 segment LED displays something other than a unit number when the power switch is turned ON see section 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions and carry out the specified corrective action If the displayed information does not change even when you carry out the corrective action it is probably a malfunction Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs 2 20 IM MW100 01E 2 6 Connecting the Ethernet Cable Connection Procedure Connector Connect the Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port on the main module Connection to the PC Make the connection via a hub For a one to one connection with a PC make the connection as shown in the figure below In the same manner you can connect multiple MW10
211. nd the computer If X OFF is received from the computer while the instrument is sending data data sending stops and restarts when the next X ON code is received CS from the computer is ignored Receive Data Control Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer When the used capacity of the instrument s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes an X OFF code is sent to the computer and when the buffer reaches 511 byte the X ON code is sent RS True fixed XON RS Send Data Control Software handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer If X OFF is received from the personal computer while the instrument is sending data data sending stops and restarts when the next X ON code is received CS from the computer is ignored Receive Data Control Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer When the used capacity of the instrument s receive buffer reaches 1537 bytes RS is set to False and when the buffer reaches 511 byte RS is set to True CS RS Send Data Control Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer If CS becomes False while the instrument is sending data transmission stops and restarts when CS becomes True X OFF and X ON from the computer are treated as data Receive Data Control Hardware handshaking is not performed between the instrument and the computer When the used capacity of the instrument s r
212. ne System initialization System reconstruction Syst m seltirig cech korea cds aae tee nhi dna d T Page tag display tag settings eene 3 41 tag stings iirinn iyen arane iaee 1 15 5 20 terminal arrangement markings sseessess 2 6 terminal block terminal cover termination resistance thermocouple eterne nnne thermocouple settings eseeeeeeee thinning operation settings thinning recording function sees thinning settings sseeen llITIO reor rr eee Ue rera ia A ELE Ria time accuracy eee creen eter tette ei time synchronization client Settings TLOG computation TLOG functions f transfer time shift essssssseeeneneeene transmission output senienas asnar transmission output control transmit start ussssse transport and storage conditions trend display rin ner orn tnnt trip line setting i rrr nenne rennes troubleshooting eene nnns Uo Page unbalance adjustment sene 1 32 unit number neret tre terree hes 3 11 unit number display seeeeeeeeeeneenn 1 11 upper limit alarm user function keys user interface user priVIleges c suere cre ere tne enean ser settings enir
213. network utilities Section 3 13 tart and stop Starting and stopping data While online you can start and stop measurement computation measurement computation data measurement computation and and recording p and recording recording from a PC Section 3 16 Monitor data and Measured data and alarm display alarms settings while online Display and Display data using the Viewer software check data See the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E 1 8 IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module The main module is the central component of the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Names and Functions of Parts Communication status LED Ethernet port Check the communication status Used for main unit settings Top LINK LED and network connections Illuminates orange when ready for communication see 2 6 Connecting an Bottom ACT LED Ethernet Cable or 3 2 Illuminates green when packets are sent received Connecting to the MW100 7 segment LED Displays the operational status of the MW100 see Displays in this section or section 4 1 7 Segment Status indicator The operational status of the instrument is indicated by the illumination of the LED LED Error Display CF card slot Insert the CF card to save data and perform other tasks N F X 3 7 3 see section 2 11 Handling of the E OMNVVYICOCI Dip switch 1 OF Gard or 3 3 Sy sien Settings omes o 0 OO
214. nnels On the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module Six Channel Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module and 4 CH High Speed Digital Input Module since measurement occurs sequentially by channel it is not synchronized between channels it can be said to be synchronized within measurement intervals Measurement Groups Three measurement intervals can be set and measurement channels can be assigned to each interval There is a particular order in which measurement intervals can be set to measurement groups For more information see section 3 4 Setting Acquisition Conditions for Measured and Computed Data A first order lag filter is available You can select a time constant time until 63 296 of the output value is reached corresponding to the measurement interval indicated in the equation below Time constant measurement interval x N where N 5 10 20 25 40 50 or 100 For details see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Differential computation between channels and linear scaling are possible Linear scaling converts the measured values for a specific purpose scaled values using the following equation Scal TN X SPnin x SCmax SCmin X Measured value cale va ues SP SP SCmin SPmax Specified span maximum mes nn SPmin Specified span minimum SCmax Specified scale maximum SCmin Specified scale minimum MATH Types Notation Differential comp
215. ns Order of Operations in Expressions Expressions are hierarchical according to the table below The operations are listed in the table from top to bottom in order of precedence These precedences must be taken into account when writing expressions Type Operators High precedence Arithmetic TLOG and CLOG functions ABS SQR LOG EXP TLOG MAX TLOG MIN TLOG P P TLOG SUM TLOG AVE TLOG PSUM CLOG MAX CLOG MIN CLOG P P CLOG AVE Conditional expressions EXPR19 EXPR2 EXPR3 Exponentiation k Logical negation NOT Multiplication and division Addition and subtraction Relational operation GT LT GE LE Equivalence EQ NE Logical product AND Logical sum exclusive OR OR XOR Low precedence MATH Reference Channels The following channels can be referenced for data used in computations Type Channel number Description Measurement Channel 001 to 060 Data from measurement channels Computation channels A001 to A300 Data from MATH channels Channels A061 to A300 are used for communication input only Communication input channels C001 to C300 Numerical values in expressions substituted with communication input Flag input channels F01 to F60 Set in expressions as the constant 1 or 0 Calculation constant K01 to K60 Represented as a fixed constant in expressions Program channels P01 to P03 Inputs broken line
216. o 99999999 1 999999 9 to 9999999 9 2 99999 99 to 999999 99 3 9999 999 to 99999 999 4 999 9999 to 9999 9999 Handling Units in Computations In computations computed values measured and computed data are handled as numbers without units Also they are unrelated to the math channel units Example Expression 001 002 K01 001 measurement ch 1 20 mV 002 measurement ch 2 30 V KO1 math constant 10 Given the above the computed result is 60 TLOG PSUM Settings Alarm Level When performing pulse integration at an interval of 10 ms or 50 ms an input module of 100 ms interval or higher is required in addition to a module enabled for DI input for TLOG PSUM computation Also set the MATH interval to 100 ms or higher You can implement alarm actions based on the computed result Four levels can be set per channel Available alarm types are upper limit and lower limit There is no hysteresis function 1 48 IM MW100 01E 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Math Error Data Processing Processing of measurement channels referenced in expressions and data referenced in math channels is as follows Note that error data plus over data and minus over data can be processed using special MATH items Processing upon Math Error When the computation results in an error the following choices are available Choice for the Computed Result Notation Set to plus over OVER Set to minus over O
217. o the sampling interval indicated in the table below Time constant measurement interval x N where N 5 10 20 25 40 50 or 100 Measurement Interval s Selectable Time Constants s N 5 N 10 N 20 N 25 N 40 N 50 N 100 0 01 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 1 0 05 0 25 0 5 1 125 2 2 5 5 0 1 0 5 1 2 2 5 4 5 10 0 2 1 2 4 5 8 10 20 0 5 2 5 5 10 125 20 25 50 1 5 10 20 25 40 50 100 2 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 5 25 50 100 125 200 250 500 10 50 100 200 250 400 500 1000 20 100 200 400 500 800 1000 2000 30 150 300 600 750 1200 1500 3000 60 300 600 1200 1500 2400 3000 6000 IM MW100 01E 5 2 Main Module Specifications MATH Differential computation between channels Differential computation between arbitrary channels DCV TC RTD DI strain resistance Linear scaling Scalable ranges DCV TC RTD DI strain resistance Scaling range 30000 to 30000 Scaling display range 32000 to 32000 Decimal point position Arbitrary Units Can be arbitrarily set using up to six characters MATH Function Specifications M1 Option The following MATH functions can be added with options Number of MATH channels 60 can also be used for communication input Number of channels for communication input 240 Computation start stop Execution of computation starts and stops according to user commands Start Stop key Event Action function or communication commands Reset clear computed v
218. of parameters Check the number of parameters E408 Parameter string too long Keep the length of individual parameters within 512 Bytes E411 Daylight saving time function not available Not available with the current model E412 Temperature unit selection not available Not available with the current model E413 MATH option not available Not available with the current model E414 Serial communication interface option not Not available with the current model available 4 6 IM MW100 01E 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions Communication Error The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E501 Login first First finish logging in E502 Login failed try again Enter the correct user name and password E503 Connection count exceeded the upper limit Close unneeded connections and reconnect E504 Connection has been lost Try to make a new connection E505 Connection has time out Try to make a new connection E520 FTP function not available Enable the function E521 FTP control connection failed Check the FTP server address and the main unit address setting Also check the Ethernet cable
219. oltage Channel to channel 30 VACrms Between input and ground 250 VACrms B12 B35 30 VACrms NDI However NDIS connector shell is connected to earth potential Common mode rejection ratio When the integration time is 16 67 ms or more 120 dB or more When the integration time is 1 67 ms 80 dB or more voltage conversion value at 50 60 Hz 0 196 bridge voltage of 2 v Normal mode rejection ratio For integral time of 16 67 ms or more 40 dB or more 50 60 Hz 0 1 For integral time of 1 67 50 60 Hz is not rejected voltage conversion value given a bridge voltage of 2 V Insulation resistance Between input and earth 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Withstand voltage Between input and earth 2300 VAC for one minute Channel to channel 30 VACrms or less Power consumption Approx 3 W one module Weight Approx 0 5kg External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Terminal type B12 B35 Clamp terminal board is detachable NDI NDIS detachable by channel Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 excluding NDI Does not apply to the NDIS terminal Effects of Operating Conditions The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16 67 ms or more Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power up Effects of ambient temperature The effect received by changes in 10 C increments of the ambient temperature is 0 1 of range or less Effects of power fluctua
220. ome with the following connectors The actually installed connectors depend on the power supply input section specifications and options Ethernet RS 422A 485 connector C3 option e RS 232 connector C2 option CF card slot Power supply inlet power supply input section specification 1M Power supply screw terminals power supply input section specification 1W 2M 3W IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Displays The MW100 indicates its operating conditions with the following displays e e e 7 segment LED Status indicators Communication status LED 7 Segment LED Displays the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit s unit number operation status end of operation and errors e Unit Number Display Unit numbers can be set from 00 to 89 Lit HH is displayed Display of the Self Test Operation on Startup When the power is turned ON the setting of dip switch 1 is displayed oi followed by the operation preparation status E and then a self check is performed While the Self check is in progress the following displays are repeated m gt p o t Key Lock Status A key lock function is included for preventing accidental manipulation of the MW100 front panel keys The key lock status is indicated by a dot at the bottom of the unit number The example shown is for a unit of number 00 Keylock release Keylock rn rrr LILI LILI Unit number Unit number and dot In Progress Display
221. on is unlimited When selecting relay output other than alarm output relays the reflash function specification is disabled You can specify the reflash function when OR is selected for the AND OR function and Non Hold is selected for the Hold Non Hold function Alarm1 status Alarm2 status Alarm3 status i Reflash function relay status Sa ik 200ms 200ms IM MW100 01E 1 43 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Overview of the MATH Function You can enter expressions using constants operators and functions described below The computed results can be displayed and recorded saved MATH allows you to determine the average maximum minimum of a specified channel on a specified date time or output events start stop record reset time etc under specified conditions Number of MATH Channels Computation can be performed on sixty channels and 240 channels can be used for communication input The maximum number of characters that can be used in an expression is 120 for MATH channels and 8 for communication input channels MATH Types The following types of computations can be performed Basic math Logical operations Relational operations Arithmetic functions TLOG functions CLOG functions Conditional expressions Basic Math Type Operator Example Explanation Addition 001 002 Finds the sum of measured values on channels 001 and 002 Subtraction 002 001 Finds the
222. on using communication command see the MW100 Communication Command manual IM MW100 17E 1 From the top screen click System Settings gt Module Information under the Top item 2 Selectthe initialization level from the Initialization Level box under System information 3 Click the Initialize button Initialization is performed For information on the initialization operating screens see section 3 3 System Settings 4 18 IM MW100 01E Chapter 5 Specification 5 1 Common Specifications Normal Operating Conditions Rated power supply voltage AC power supply with or without AC adapter 100 to 240 VAC DC power supply 12 to 28 VDC Supply voltage range used AC power supply with or without AC adapter 100 to 250 VAC DC power supply 10 to 32 VDC Power supply frequency 50 Hz 296 60 Hz 2 Power consumption AC power or DC power with AC adapter Approx 70 VA max DC power supply Approx 35 VA max When any six I O modules are installed Vibration 10 to 60 Hz 0 2m s or less Shock Not allowed Magnetic field 400 A m or less 50 60 Hz Position Position horizontally with feet down Structure Not explosion proof Usage location Indoors Operating altitude 2 000 m or less Overvoltage category Il per IEC61010 1 CSA22 2 No 61010 1 Measurement category Il per IEC61010 1 CSA22 2 No 61010 1 Pollution degree 2 per IEC61010 1 CSA22 2 No 61010 1 Transport and Storage Conditions Environm
223. ong distance situations potential differences can arise causing damage to instruments or communication abnormalities Also if the converter has no SG terminal use the converter as is without connecting signal ground For details see the user s manual for the converter Some converters not recommended here have reversed signal polarity A B or markings When using such converters be sure to reverse the connections For 2 wire configurations to avoid data collision during sending and receiving the ON OFF state of the converters send driver must be controlled by the connected upstream device When using a recommended converter use RS 232 RTS to control ON OFF of the send driver When Using Instruments That Only Support RS 422A For 4 wire configurations up to thirty two MW100s can be connected to a single upstream device However if at least one of the devices in the system only supports RS 422A it may not be possible to connect up to thirty two units When Using Recorders That Only Support Yokogawa RS 422A The maximum number of units that can be connected in this case is sixteen Drivers for some conventional Yokogawa recorders the HR2400 uR series and other recorders only support RS 422A When such recorders are used only a maximum of sixteen units can be connected Nole e o e e e e In the RS 422A standard up to ten units can be connected to a single port in 4 wire configurations Termination Res
224. onitor Display Settings Contents of the Status Bar MW100 serial number MW100 firmware version Measurement group recording operation 1 to 3 thinning recording operation status T Recording Yellow Trigger wait state Green Stop state Gray tH28H5NTH Memory capacity of the CF card Used space displayed with a green bar When the CF card is not installed the not installed display appears MANDO 27E123758 F5 100 5296 i oam 209 MATH processing performance M1 Option When computation processing reaches 100 data loss occurs Monitor Display Screen Trend Display Select the waveform display zone Auto zone Slide zone Full zone User zone Zoom in or out of the time axis Measurement Alarm display ON OFF interval Switch waveform thickness 100 msec Select Y axis display Alarm indication ON OFF NEL EEE E Channel ON OFF Zone display section ON OFF 2 00 21 12 20 21 12 40 21 13 00 21 13 20 2005 06 01 Time h m s Time axis zoom factor Selecting the Display Zone of Waveforms User Zone Displays each waveform at the position of the Zone specified in the Display Scale The Y axis displays active channels Full Zone Each waveform is displayed in the full zone of the waveform display area The Y axis displays active channels Slide Zone Each waveform is displayed slightly staggered across the waveform display area The Y axis
225. or Set the last channel equal or greater than the first channel Modbus command E168 Too many channels for command number Set a valid number of channels for the data type Execution Error The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E201 Cannot execute due to different operation mode Confirm the operation mode E202 Cannot execute when in setting mode Change the mode before execution E203 Cannot execute when in measurement mode Change the mode before execution E204 Cannot change or execute while saving to memory Stop the save operation before executing E205 Cannot execute during MATH operation Stop the MATH operation before executing E206 Cannot change or execute during MATH operation Stop the MATH operation before executing E207 Cannot change or execute while saving loading Execute after the settings are saved or loaded settings E211 No relays for communication input found Check installation of relays and the relay output types E212 Initial balance failed Check the wiring E213 No channels for initial balance found Check the target channels E214 No channels for transmission output found S
226. ou wish to set from the Channel List list Enter a tag name in the Tag box of each tag number You can use fifteen alphanumeric characters Click the Apply button ons l Top gt Display Setting gt Channel Tag Setting 001 010 z E 5 wr 0 weUT2 03 NPUTG 04 INPUTOA SCS o INPUTOS SC jouTPuT o jourpuTa2 o jouTPuTOs CS 09 jouTPUTOa 10 ourums Ap E E E E S E S 2 S 5 e Message Settings You can specify a message to be written along with data saving during recording From the top screen click Display Setting gt Message Setting Enter the message in the Message box in the Message List You can use fifteen alohanumeric characters Click the Apply button Top gt Display Setting gt Message Setting po e Noo Message fi Mesan Apply IM MW100 01E 3 41 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Setting Display Colors 1 From the top screen click Display Setting gt Channel Color Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list 3 Selectthe color you wish to assign in the Color list of each channel Color samples are shown towards the bottom of the screen 4 Click the Apply button Top gt Display Setting gt Channel Color Setting No
227. ound the alarm value Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm PUSH activated Aia Alarm release setting p Measured value Hysteresis Alarm release Alarm setting Measured vale Alarm activated IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Alarm Output Timing The output interval is 100 ms Therefore when the measurement interval is 10 ms or 50 ms the alarm output data is accumulated over 100 ms intervals and output at 100 ms intervals based on the accumulated data Rate of Change Upper Limit Lower Limit Alarm The rate of change of the measured values is checked over the rate of change detection interval An alarm occurs if the rate of change of the measured value in the rising direction exceeds the specified value High limit on rate of change alarm Low limit on rate of change alarm Change in the measured value j 3 E A E A t of ch i i mount of change in 3 Amount of change in 3 TL the setting Ti TP 5 the setting To Ti 3 2 Tn Y 2 M E E N 5 o o Change in the o o computed value t t2 Time gt t t2 Time pil M90 Interval Interval 2 11 t2 t1 Alarm Hold Non Hold You can select whether when factors resulting in output cease to exist alarms are cleared when the output factors are cleared or alarms are held for their full duration alarm ACK When set to non hold When set to
228. output AO Output Method Output Method Notation Actions Transmission Output TRANS Outputs a voltage or current according to the measured results of the input channel specified on the same unit You can also produce pattern output using the broken line input function Command Output COM Outputs specified values based on values sent from the PC Output Range Output Range Notation Output range Voltage 10V 10 000 V to 10 000 V Current 20 mA 0 000 mA to 20 000 mA Output Update Interval The output is updated at 100 ms minimum intervals It is not synchronized to the measurement interval Operation upon Startup and Errors See section 1 11 Operation of the Eight Channel Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the Eight Channel Medium Speed PWM Output Module Output Operation during Calibration Calibration Condition Output Operation Channels being calibrated Command output output of calibration value Non calibrated channels Holds the output value holds the value last output during steady operation see section 1 11 1 36 IM MW100 01E 1 10 Functions of the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module This module has eight outputs for pulse wave duty A certain duty pulse waveform is output according to the specified pulse interval A pulse interval can be set for each channel Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Output Types Output Type Notation No output SKIP
229. ox Enter a start time in the box 4 Select an ending month week and day of the week for the end of Summer time in the End Time box Enter an end time in the box 5 Click the Apply button The Summer time and Winter time start times are enabled Timer List No Mode Relative Time AbsoluteTime Ref Time Interval resp ON NE I ON I E esoo M M b Be few E E SI N B I B I 8 NB LN I E er al ee ea oo Apply 3 10 IM MW100 01E 3 3 System Settings Other Settings You can set the MW100 unit number units of temperature key lock for preventing inadvertent operations alarm hold and rate of change interval From the top screen click System Setting Other Settings Unit Number Enter a number from 0 to 89 for identifying the unit in the Unit No box Temperature Unit Select Celsius DEG C or Fahrenheit DEG F in the Temperature Unit list Main Unit Key Lock If the Key Lock check box is selected the key lock becomes active Alarm Status Hold If the Hold check box is selected alarms are held Rate of Change Interval ilis Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Increase Interval box under Rate of Change Alarm 2 Enter the measurement count that determines the interval in the Decrease Interval box under Rate of Change Alarm Click the Apply button The settings for each item are enabled Unit No p o Temperature Unit DEG Cr Key Lock M Enable Alarm Indicator Dis
230. pecify channels for transmission output E215 No channels for arbitrary output found Specify channels for arbitrary output E221 No measurement channels found Check the measurement module measurement group number measurement interval and other settings E222 Invalid measurement interval Set the measurement interval so that Meas gr 1 meas gr 2 lt meas gr 3 E223 Too many measurement channels The number of measurable channels during 10 ms measurement is 10 and for 50 ms measurement 30 E224 No MATH channels found Check the MATH channel settings E225 Invalid MATH interval Set the MATH interval to measurement groups of 100 ms or more When measuring with measurement modules set the measurement group numbers on which to perform measurement E226 Cannot start stop MATH operation Cannot execute because MATH start is set for the level detection action E227 Cannot start stop recording Cannot execute because MATH start is set for the level detection action Execution Errors The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E301 CF card error detected Do not eject or otherwise disturb the card while being accessed E302 No enough f
231. peed Universal Input Module Specifications sssse 5 29 5 6 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications 5 33 5 7 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Specifications sssessss 5 37 5 8 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module Specifications sssessssss 5 40 5 9 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module Specifications ssusss 5 41 5 10 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Specifications ssesessss 5 43 5 11 Operations Common to the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module 5 45 5 12 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module Specifications ssssss 5 46 Appendix Appendix 1 Supported Characters sssssssssssseseeeeeeenenneeenere enne nennen nnns App 1 Index IM MW100 01E XV Chapter 1 Explanation of Functions 1 1 System Overview MW100 Data Acquisition Unit The MW100 Data Acquisition Unit consists of a main module equipped with an Ethernet port I O modules for input and output of signals these are the same as those for the MX100 Data Acquisition Unit and a base plate on which the first two items are mounted The main module comes with a Web server function allowing users to easily enter settings and monitor measured data from a PC using a browser The MW100 can be
232. perform user registration and enter FTP e mail settings and other items Top gt Communication Setting User Setting Modbus Master Setting 1 Modbus Master Setting 2 Modbus Client Setting 1 IP Address Setting Modbus Client Setting 2 Modbus Client Setting 3 Server Setting DNS Client Setting FTP Client Setting Mail Client Setting 1 Mail Client Setting 2 The MW100 has a Measurement mode and a Setting mode and the mode must be changed depending on the operation to be performed For operating procedures see section 3 3 System Settings To Single Screen or Dual Screens for the monitor switch to Measurement mode The items to set after switching to Measurement mode are shown in the figure below To modify channel settings system settings display settings or communication settings switch to Setting mode The items to set after switching to Setting mode are shown in the figure below Top gt System Setting gt Status Information Kind Status Operation Measurement ETOP T MATH ETOP Recording ETOP ism T CH IM MW100 01E uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas 3 2 Connection to the MW100 Connection to the MW100 can be made using Ethernet or serial communications optional Also when performing communication using the Modbus protocol Modbus settings are required When the login function is enabled connection is made after entering a user name and password Setting Mode Ethernet
233. play M Hold Rate of change Alarm Increase Interval 8 Declease Interval 8 Apply Status Information and Processing You can change the MW100 operation mode operate the main unit keys and check alarm statuses Changing Status Information Mode From the top screen click System Setting Status Information You can perform the same procedure in the Status table in the top screen Switching between Measurement Mode and Setting Mode 1 In the Operation box under Measurement you can select START to switch to Measurement mode or STOP to switch to Setting mode 2 Click the Apply button The changed status is displayed in the Status display box Computation Start Stop 1 In the Operation box under the MATH item you can select START to start computation or STOP to stop computation 2 Click the Apply button The changed status is displayed in the Status display box You can also start and stop computation from the Monitor screen Recording Start Stop 1 In the Operation box under the Recording item you can select START to start recording or STOP to stop recording 2 Click the Apply button The changed status is displayed in the Status display box You can also start and stop recording from the Monitor screen IM MW100 01E uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 3 System Settings Checking Status Information When an alarm occurs Waiting Alarm ACK is displayed in each display box Processing and Operation Operating Main Unit K
234. ply Cord Basic Specification Code 1M 2 17 Wiring the Power Supply Terminal Power Supply Cord Basic Specification Code 1W 2 18 Wiring the Power Supply Terminal Power Supply Cord Basic Specification 2M or 3W 2 19 Turning the Power Switch ON and OFF nennen nnne 2 20 Connecting the Ethernet Cable sessesseeeeeeneeeeennnen nennen nennen nnns 2 21 Connection Procedure isise a e r aee ANa nennen nnne n rese tnntn nennt nnne nens 2 21 Checking the Communication Status cecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeseaeesaeessaeeeeeeeeeenaees 2 21 Initializing Settings 2 eth erede ea eb e Cete 2 21 Connecting the RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option 2 22 Terminal Wiring and Signal Names essere nennen nnne 2 22 Connection Procedure we ice ttd er d ur eee te de ecd 2 22 xii IM MW100 01E Contents 2 8 Connecting the RS 232 Interface C2 Option sssseee 2 25 Connector Pin Assignments and Signal Names see 2 25 Handshakirig iuein tee Eoi DP REM 2 25 2 9 Serial Interface Settings eee dread pte pa ere emet 2 27 2 10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit ssesesss 2 28 Integrating A D Converter sese enne nnne nennen nennen nnne 2 28 First Order kag Filters ienero tuer atl tM ae d tees eed 2 30 211 Handling of the GE Card cie acne aie eoe 2
235. quency Attenuation Pass band Cutoff band 0dB F pu 7 3dB Frequency If the time constant of the first order lag filter is set long the cutoff frequency is lowered and frequency bandwidth that can be rejected is widened Set an appropriate time constant according to the frequency of the noise you wish to reject 2 30 IM MW100 01E 2 11 Handling of the CF Card Handling Precautions of the CF Card Note the following points when using the CF card For the general handling precautions of the CF card see the instruction manual that came with the CF card The CF card is a precision electronic device Do not use or store the CF card in an environment with strong static electricity or an environment where electric noise tends to appear Donotremove the CF card from the card slot while data is being written Doing so can damage or erase the data Inserting the CF Card When inserting the CF card into the card slot first touch the antistatic metal then open the slot cover and finally insert the card with the back side facing left as in the figure below Antistatic metal Card slot Eject lever Reverse side of the CF card Slot cover Ejecting the CF Card Be sure to check that the CF card is not being accessed before ejecting the card from the slot To eject the CF card first open the slot cover while touching the antistatic metal then push the eject lever Then press the eject lever that came out once aga
236. r pss p aor ar sf ps p apr Hr ef pe p or fur ef ps e Hor ama pao p ort fer ST Apply Setting Up and Executing Strain Input Initial Balancing If the measurement channel is strain input you can enter settings for executing initial balancing This setting is allowed even if the measurement channel is something other than strain input but has no effect in that case 1 Fromthe top screen click Channel Settings Strain Input Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list 3 Turn ON the channel on which you wish to perform initial balancing in the Initial Balancing list 4 Click the Apply button to finalize Channel List 031 040 v No Initial Balancing ps2 ores psc or sd pss forF se forF pez fore ps o sd Apply 5 Execute the Initial balance items in the Status information of the system settings For details see section 3 3 System Settings IM MW100 01E 3 17 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 6 MATH Settings MATH Channel Settings and the M1 Option Setting Mode You can set the MATH operation expressions scales MATH coefficients and MATH groups This section also explains settings for program channels and communication input data For information on entering the MATH span in expressions see section 3 12 Scale Input Methods Entering Expressions 1 From the top screen click Channel Setting gt MATH Channel Setting
237. r less 50 60 Hz peak value including the signal component RTD 100 Q 50 mVpeak RTD 10 Q 25 Q 50 Q 10 mVpeak Normal mode rejection ratio For integration time of 16 67 ms or more 40 dB or more 50 60 Hz 0 1 For integration time of 1 67 ms 50 60 Hz is not rejected The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage conversion value when current flows Common mode voltage 600 VACrms 50 60 Hz reinforced double insulation Common mode rejection ratio 50 60 Hz 0 196 500 Q unbalanced between minus measurement terminal and ground The RTD and resistance ranges indicates the voltage conversion value when current flows When the integration time is 16 67 ms or more 120 dB or more When the integration time is 1 67 ms or more 80 dB or more Common mode voltage between channels 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz reinforced double insulation Noise rejection Rejection by the integrating A D converter and the use of low pass filters Input resistance For DC voltage 1 V range or less and thermocouple range 10 MQ or less For DC voltage 2 V range or higher Approx 1 MQ While measurement stopped Approx 1 MQ Insulation resistance Between input terminal and earth terminal 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Input bias current 10 nA or less except for burnout setting Withstand voltage 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between input terminals 3700 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal Input signal source res
238. r Ch Lower Upper D P ba vorda A Feoooo zoo forF zf Ta oz rc AR uoo veo orc zf a ns ato z Pao foo jeooo orr zf Ta foro vorda z Fee eoo or Jf Apply 3 16 IM MW100 01E 3 5 Setting Measurement Conditions indstop indstart Measurement Channel Settings Filter and Thermocouple Settings You can set filters for measurement channels Also when the input type is set to thermocouple TC you can set the burnout RJC behavior This setting is allowed even if the input type of the measurement channel is something other than thermocouple TC but has no effect in that case From the top screen click Channel Setting Filter Burnout RJC Setting Setting the Filter Coefficient Select a coefficient in the Filter list For information about filter coefficients see section 2 10 Measures against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit Setting the Burnout Select the direction in which the measured value is set off the range when a burnout detection occurs from the Burnout list Reference Junction Compensation 1 Select the type of reference junction compensation in the Type box under RJC 2 Enterareference junction compensation voltage in the Voltage uV box Set when reference junction compensation is set to external EXT Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Channel List fost 040 E No Filter Burnout RJC Type Voltage uv Bs o xor Aea p2 p ue fe
239. reas inside the instrument have high voltages Ground the Instrument before Making External Connections Connect the protective grounding before connecting to the item under measurement or to an external control unit Avoid Damage to the Protective Structure Operating the instrument in a manner not described in this manual may damage its protective structure Exemption from Responsibility YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately YOKOGAWA assumes no liability to any party for any loss or damage direct or indirect caused by the user or any unpredictable defect of the product Handling Precautions of the Software YOKOGAWA makes no warranties regarding the software accompanying this product except those stated in the WARRANTY that is provided separately Usethe software on a single PC You must purchase another copy of the software if you are to use the software on another PC Copying the software for any purposes other than backup is strictly prohibited Please store the original media containing the software in a safe place Reverse engineering such as decompiling of the software is strictly prohibited No portion of the software supplied by YOKOGAWA may be transferred exchanged sublet or leased for use by any third party without prior permission by YOKOGAWA IM MW100 01E iii Checking the Contents of the Package Unpack the box and chec
240. ree space on CF card Delete unneeded files to free up space Replace the CF card E303 CF card is write protected Check write permissions E311 CF card not inserted Insert the CF card E312 Cannot format CF card Check the CF card E313 CF card damaged or not formatted Reinsert the CF card or format it E314 File is write protected Check write permissions E315 No such file or directory Check the files and folders May occur in the MW100 internal processing during an abnormality IM MW100 01E eoueueojure y pue Punoouse qno4j 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E316 Number of files exceeds the upper limit Delete unneeded files to reduce the number of files E317 Invalid file or directory name Check the files and folders E318 Unknown file type Check the files E319 Same name of file or directory already exists Check the files and folders E320 Invalid file or directory operation Check the files and folders E321 File is in use Wait until access is finished E331 Setting file not found Check the name of the setting file E332 Setting file is broken Could not load setting file because it is corrupted E341 FIFO buffer overflow You must reduce the time required to store files Delete unneeded files to free up space E342 Data to be saved to file not found Check the settings E343 Power fai
241. resistance from 1 to n 1 IM MW100 01E 2 23 Bui pue uonejeisul s 2 7 Connecting the RS 422A 485 Interface C3 Option AN Note ____W _ The noise rejection method differs depending on the conditions of use In the connection example the cable shielding is only connected to the ground of the main unit one sided grounding This method is effective for noise rejection during long distance communications and other processes when there is a difference of potential between the grounding of the computer and that of the main unit If there is no difference in potential between the PC ground and the main unit ground it may also be effective to connect to the PC ground as well two sided ground There are also cases where it is effective to use two sided grounding with a capacitor connected in series on one side Consider the above options when taking measures against noise With the 2 wire configuration Modbus protocol after the last data is output from the upstream PC the 485 driver must be set to high impedance before 3 5 characters Serial Interface Converter The following are recommended models of converters RA SYSTEMS CORP MODEL RC 77 LINE EYE SI 30FA YOKOGAWA ML2 CAUTION Some converters not recommended here have non insulated FG and SG terminals When using such converters do not connect them as shown on the previous page do not connect anything to the converter s FG ad SG terminals Especially for l
242. ription MX150 MX100 MW100 base plate includes two brackets for DIN rail mount Base type 1 to 6 The value of the suffix code corresponds to the maximum number of input output modules that can be installed MX150 6 is for one main module and six input output modules IM MW100 01E Checking the Contents of the Package Standard Accessories The following standard accessories are supplied with the main module Check that all contents are present and that they are undamaged Power Cord one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes CM UL CSA Standard VDE Standard SAA Standard BS Standard GB Standard complies with CCC A1006WD A1009WD A1024WD A1054WD A1064WD Note Not included when screw terminals are specified for the power section Suffix code W AC adapter and Power cord Model 772075 Power Cord for AC adapter one of the following power cords is supplied according to the instrument s suffix codes A SAA Standard BS Standard GB Standard complies with CCC UL CSA Standard VDE Standard Note Not included when screw terminals are specified for the power section Suffix code W MW100 Viewer Software MW100 Manual CD ROM Model MW180 Part number B8724XA Contains this manual IM MW100 01E the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E and MW100 Communication comand Manual IM MW100 17E Paper Manuals MW100 Data Acquisition
243. rom the top screen click Communication Setting gt DNS Client Setting 2 Inthe Primary and Secondary boxes under DNS Server enter the IP addresses of the respective DNS servers 3 Inthe Primary and Secondary boxes under Domain Suffix enter the domain name 4 Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt DNS Client Setting DNS Server Primary 132 168 1 101 Secondary 132 168 1 102 Domain Suffix Primary dagmaster com Secondary Apply FTP Client Settings From the top screen click Communication Setting gt FTP Client Setting Select the Client function check box to enable the function Enter the shift amount in minutes in the Transfer time shift box Select the number of the destination to be set in the Destination list You can set up to two destinations Enter the server name in the Server Name box Enter the server port number in the Port Number box Enter the user name in the User Name box Enter the password in the Password box Enter the folder to be accessed when opening a connection in the Directory box 10 You can select the PASV Mode check box to use FTP passive mode 11 Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt FTP Client Setting OO MoS o 9 o o FTP Client Function IV Enable Time Shift 0 min FTP Server i Server ftp dagmaster com Port 21 User mw OOuser Password ecccccce Directory data PASV Mode I Enable Apply 3 32 IM M
244. rom the top screen click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item 2 Click the Start Recording icon Recording starts Stopping Recording 1 From the top screen click Single Screen or Dual Screen under the Monitor item 2 Click the Stop Recording icon Recording stops For information about the operation screen see section 3 16 Measured Data Monitor Display Settings Computation and Recording According to Status You can control the status of measurement recording and computation on the main module according to changes in status For details see section 3 3 System Settings Checking the Operating Status of the MW100 Using the Status Indicators You can confirm the operational status of the MW100 by viewing the status indicators on the front panel MEASURE Behavior Color Indication Off Setting mode On Green Measurement mode RECORD Behavior Color Indication Turning Off Recording stopped On Green Recording Blinking Green Transitioning from recording to recording stop ALARM Behavior Color Indication Turning Off No alarm On Red Alarm active or alarm hold MATH Behavior Color Indication Turning Off Computation stopped On Green Computing Blinking Green Transitioning from computing to computing stopped IM MW100 01E 3 31 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 14 Network Utility Settings Setting Mode DNS Client Settings 1 F
245. romagnetic induction The protective earth ground must be connected to low ground resistance 100 Q or less When using the reference junction compensation of the MW100 through thermocouple input take measures to stabilize the temperature at the terminal section Always close and secure the terminal cover Do not use thick wires with high heat radiation effect cross sectional area of 0 5 mm or smaller recommended Keep the ambient temperature consistent Large temperature fluctuation occurs such as when a fan nearby is turned ON OFF Connecting the input wires in parallel with other instruments may mutually affect the measured values If you need to make a parallel connection Turn OFF burnout Ground each instrument at a single common point Donotturn ON OFF the instrument while measurement is in progress It may cause adverse affects on the other instrument Note that RTDs and resistors cannot be connected in parallel IM MW100 01E 2 9 Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Wiring Procedures 1 Turn OFF the power to the instrument 2 Loosen the terminal cover attachment screw and lift up the terminal cover 3 Connect the signal wires to the terminals 4 Return the terminal cover to the original position and secure it with the screw 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Attachment screw for terminal cover Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Wiring the Unive
246. roup Reset Clears all MATH channel data including MATH alarms per the Event Action function or requests from communication commands If this request occurs during a computation it is executed on the next computation interval and computation starts Also if the request occurs while computation is stopped it is cleared when computation starts Math Groups Specifies multiple channels from among Math channels 1 through 60 Up to seven groups can be set Math groups are used with group reset Specify one from among the measurement group numbers and perform computation Select a group having a measurement interval of 100 ms or higher The following conditions apply to the specified measurement group nthe selected measurement group all measurement channels must include an input module with no SKIP channels If there is no input module or if all channels of the input module are SKIP you can specify measurement group arbitrarily When multiple measurement groups specify the same measurement interval specify the measurement group with the largest number The upper and lower limits for the display of the monitor screen and other items The specifiable range of numbers is as follows according to the decimal place If the computed results fall outside of the allowable numerical value setting range they are displayed on screen as plus over or minus over data Decimal Place Computation span setting range 0 9999999 t
247. rrors The code is divided into two parts which are displayed alternately on the 7 segment LED in the first part the letter E appears in the left digit with the hundreds digit of the error code to the right and the second part consists of the last two digits of the error code Display Possible Problem Corrective Action E001 Invalid function parameter Enter the correct parameter E002 Value exceeds the setting range Set a value within the allowable range E003 Incorrect real number format Use the correct real number format E004 Real number value exceeds the setting range Set a real number within the allowable range E005 Incorrect character string Set an allowable character string E006 Character string too long Set a character string within the allowable length E007 Incorrect display color format Specify a display color using the correct format E008 Incorrect date format Enter the date using the correct format E009 Data value exceeds the setting range Set a date within the allowable range E010 Incorrect time format Enter the time using the correct format E011 Time value exceeds the setting range Set a time within the allowable range E012 Incorrect time zone format Specify a time zone using the correct format E013 Time zone value exceeds the setting range Set a time zone within the allowable range E014 Incorrect IP address
248. rsal Input Module Thermocouple input RTD input T o Compensation o h lead A Lead wire resistance per wire of 10 Q or less Make the resistance of the three wires equal In the case of Pt1000 5 Q max for Pt50Q 1 Q max for Cu10 Q DC voltage input DI input contact DC current input t a t E or J _ DC current input Ecquis p i DC voltage Contact Shunt resistor fo o input o Example For 4 to 20 mA input shut resistance values should be 250 00 196 Terminal type Clamp Applicable wire size For H04 0 2 to2 5 mm AWG24 to12 For M10 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 Note __ With the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input module the A and B RTD input terminals are insulated on each channel but terminal b is shorted internally on all channels When the screw terminal plate model 772080 is connected to the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module the terminal arrangement differs from that of clamp terminals so wire according to the markings on the terminal cover 2 10 IM MW100 01E 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Wiring the 4 Wire RTD Resistance Input Module DC voltage input DI contact input RTD input resistance input o Votage A Resistance RTD HK O pA T E y 7 DC volt Contact A o Input age ontaci WA Nothing connected to the I or C terminal Resistance per lead wire of 10 or less DC current input o A DC current input CEN x Ao Shunt resistor E
249. s 20 to 50 C Note Condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where the ambient temperature is higher or if the temperature changes rapidly Measurement errors can occur when using thermocouple input In this case let the instrument adjust to the new environment for at least one hour before using the instrument Locations where the operating altitude is 2 000 m or less Well ventilated locations Install the instrument in a well ventilated location to prevent the temperature inside the instrument from rising Location where mechanical vibration is small Select a location with small mechanical vibration for installation Horizontal location Install the instrument on a flat even surface Do not install the instrument in the following places Dangerous locations where flammable liquids vapors or dust is present In direct sunlight or near heat appliances Select a location with the smallest fluctuation from room temperature 23 C as possible Placing the instrument in direct sunlight or near heat appliances can cause adverse effects Where an excessive amount of soot steam humidity dust or corrosive gas is present Soot steam humidity dust and corrosive gas can cause adverse effects on the instrument Avoid installing the instrument in an environment with a high level of such substances Near magnetic field sources Install the instrument in a location where the magnetic field is 400 A m or l
250. s 10 uV or less 2 V range or higher 0 15 of rdg or less Thermocouple 10 uV or less RTD Fluctuation per 10 Q change per line 3 lines all same resistance for 100 types 0 1 C or less other than 100 Q types 1 0 C or less fluctuation resulting from difference in resistance between lead wires of 40 mQ max difference among three wires approximately 0 1 C for Pt100 Effect of position Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule Effects of vibration The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0 2 m s is 0 196 of rdg 1 digit or less General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 60 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C External Dimensions Units mm 150 8 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 5 32 IM MW100 01E 5 6 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications Style number S2 Type of measurement DC voltage 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance DI contact LEVEL Number of inputs 6 Input method Floating unbalanced input insulation between channels A D resolution 16 bits 20000 6000 Measuring range and accuracy The accuracy
251. s Used to initialize settings ERHERNET SW ON and for other purposes see Switches and 12345678 Keys in this section TOBASE T POWER Start Stop keys Start and stop measurement START Dip m 2 computation and recording LUSCO seesection 3 13 Starting and Maii users Stopping Measurement Computation 100 240V AC 4 and Recording Tur AN j Power switch Ce ccocotubo i il Turns the power to the Msn edt iod FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA MW100 main unit ON ssign unctions to the eye SERJAL COMI ZOVA MAX 50 60Hz and OFF see Switches and Keys in this section Functional ground terminal Power supply inlet Connect the accessory power supply RS 422A 485 connector C3 option cord This is listed as a screw terminal Depending on installed options the connector may in the power supply specifications or may not be available or it may be an RS 232 connector C2 option see Communication Terminator switch C3 option Specifications in this section Turns the terminator ON and OFF Status indicators Illuminate in the following situations 2 MEASURE i ALARM Alarm activation or alarm hold ca RECORD math Computing illuminates computing processing blinking lt gt SERIAL SD Tias serial communications data Recording illuminates recording proc
252. s held until the command output request is generated Output Operation per Settings and Setting Changes Condition upon Power ON and Output Operation Condition When Power Is Turned ON Output Operation When Output Settings are Disabled Operation when power is turned ON With transmission output within a unit Before meas start Operation when power is turned ON and reference channels disabled Start measurement Output upon error occurrences Transmission output within a unit Before meas start Operation when power is turned ON Start measurement Transmission output Command output No output request Operation when power is turned ON Output requested Command output 1 38 IM MW100 01E 1 11 Operation of the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Output Operation through Setting Changes Common Setting Changes Contents Output Operation Setting changes for operation Prev value held preset value Outputs the preset value the on startup next time the power is turned ON Preset value hold prev value The last output value from the previous operation is held for the next time the power is turned ON outputs the output value active when the power was last turned OFF during the previous session Setting changes for operation Prev value held preset value Outputs the preset value the upon error occurrence next time an error occurs
253. signal source resistance of 1 kQ 1 V range or less x10 uV or less 2 V range or higher 0 15 of rdg or less RTD Fluctuation from 10 O change per line 1000 Q 100 Q types 0 1 C or less Other than 1000 2 100 Q types 1 0 C or less Resistance Fluctuation from 10 Q change per line 1 digit or less Effect of position Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule Effects of vibration The fluctuation that results by applying a sinusoidal vibration along all three axes at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an acceleration of 0 2 m s is 0 196 of rdg 1 digit or less IM MW100 01E 5 35 uoneoyioedg B 5 6 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Specifications General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 60 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C External Dimensions Units mm 150 8 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm 5 36 IM MW100 01E 5 7 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Specifications Style number S2 Number of inputs 4 Input type Strain gauge or strain gauge type sensors static strain Input method Floating balanced input isolated between channels NDIS is non isolated Measurement range and accuracy The accuracy
254. sssssseeeeeennee 2 21 3 1 5 9 event detection method sssesesssss 1 19 3 27 event function eessssesesssssseeeeeeeeenne event operation event tyDO acids ete Ee rere ties event action function sssssssseseeeeneenen 5 21 event action setting 3 27 execution error sssssessssesesseeeee nennen nennen 4 5 EXECUTION ETOS oe ended cote edet cp 4 5 execution sequence ssesssseeeeeeeeneeneennnnns 5 22 external dimensions 5 1 5 23 5 24 5 28 5 32 5 36 5 39 5 40 5 42 5 44 5 46 F 5 05 5 Page file creation notification seseseseeeeeeeeee 3 34 filename 224i tentent etta teet dede at 5 6 file size calculation sseeen 5 7 filtr S ttiNgS E 3 17 filters s 1 12 1 35 first order lag filter 1 12 2 30 Hr P M 3 27 flag input channels sese 1 46 5 4 Lee ERE 2 3 flow of operation er odere eterne 1 8 format 1 18 3 10 format type REUS 5 23 ET a a icm e PC ER RE 5 9 FTP client settings 9 82 FTP function 1 15 nilo PERI TCEPE 3 39 G Page general specifications 5 23 5 28 5 32 5 36 5 39 5 40 5 41 5 44 5 46 group reset p EE 1 48 H Page handshaking sirean US 2 25 2 27 high limit on rate of change alarm
255. surement starts when in the burnout condition or after the burnout burnout detection is disabled for up to ten measurements approximately one second Measurement Synchronization Since measurement is sequential measurement on each channel is not synchronized 1 28 IM MW100 01E 1 6 Functions of the 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module This module allows up to six inputs of DC voltage thermocouple 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance and digital input DI at a minimum measurement interval of 100 ms Terminal cover Input terminal clamp terminal Measurement Input Types Measuring Range Measurement Input Type Notation No measurement SKIP DC voltage VOLT Resistance temperature detector RTD Resistance OHM DI DI DC Voltage Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range 20 mV 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV 60 mV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 200 mV 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV 2V 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 6V 6V 6 000 to 6 000 V 20 V 20 V 20 000 to 20 000 V 100 V 100 V 100 00 to 100 00 V 60 mV high resolution 60 mVH 0 000 to 60 000 mV 1V 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V 6 V high resolution 6 VH 0 0000 to 6 0000 V Resistance Temperature Detector 1 mA Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range Pt100 Pt100 1 200 0 to 600 0 C JPt100 JPt100 1 200 0 to 550 0 C Pt100 high resolution P
256. t a time within the allowable range range E092 Output value of break point exceeds the setting Set an output value within the allowable range range E093 No break point found Set one or more break points E094 Invalid time value of first break point Set the time of break point 1 to zero E095 Invalid time sequence found in break points Set the times of break points in ascending order E100 Invalid output type Enter an output type that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number E101 Module of an invalid output type found in the Enter an output type that can be selected for all modules range of specified channels specified by the channel range E102 Invalid output range Enter an output range that can be selected for the module specified by the channel number E103 Module of an invalid output range found in the Enter an output range that can be selected for all modules range of specified channels specified by the channel range E104 Upper and lower limits of output span cannot Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of output be equal span E105 Invalid transmission reference channel Set the channel for the input module E110 Invalid channel number for contact input event Set the channel number for the universal input module or DI module IM MW100 01E 4 3 4 1 Error Display on the 7 Segment LED and Corrective Actions
257. t screw Loosen before removing the terminal plate 2 6 IM MW100 01E 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module 8 CH Medium Speed Analog 6 CH Medium Speed 4 wire RTD Resistance Output Module Input Module 8 CH PWM Output Module 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module 10 CH Medium Speed Digital D05 D24 Output Module Pull out handle The terminal plate can be The terminal block can be attached and detached attached and detached Attachment screw fixed with screws Loosen before removing the terminal plate Attaching the Screw Terminal Plate A screw terminal plate model 772080 sold separately can be attached to the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module The screw terminal plate is attached and removed in the same manner as the screw terminal block Note that the terminal arrangement is different than that of the clamp terminal plate The proper arrangement is shown on the back of the terminal covers so be sure to replace the cover along with the terminal plate For details see Handling the MX100 MW100 10 CH Screw Terminal Plate in IM MX100 77E Screw terminal plate Attachment screw Screw Terminal Block The 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input modules and 10 CH High Speed Digital Input modules allow you to remove the terminal plate and connect a 10 channel screw terminal block accessory sold
258. t100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C JPt100 high resolution JPt100 1H 140 00 to 150 00 C Ni100 SAMA Ni100SAMA 200 0 to 250 0 C Ni100 DIN Ni100DIN 60 0 to 180 0 C Ni120 Ni120 70 0 to 200 0 C Pt50 Pt50 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE Cu10GE 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N Cu10LN 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED Cu10WEED 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY Cu10BAILEY 200 0 to 300 0 C IM MW100 01E 1 29 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 Bi 1 6 Functions of the 6 CH Medium Speed Four Wire RTD Resistance Input Module Resistance Temperature Detector 1 mA cont Measuring Range Notation Rated Measuring Range J263B J263B 0 0 to 300 0K Cu10 at 20 C Cu10a392 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00392 Cu10 at 20 C Cu10a393 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00393 Cu25 at 0 C Cu25 200 0 to 300 0 C alpha 0 00425 Cu53 at 0 C Cu53 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00426035 Cu100 at 0 C Cu100 50 0 to 150 0 C alpha 0 00425 Pt25 JPt100 x 1 4 Pt25 200 0 to 550 0 C Cu10 GE high resolution Cu10GEH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 L amp N high resolution Cu10LNH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 WEED high resolution Cu10WEEDH 200 0 to 300 0 C Cu10 BAILEY high resolution Cu10BAILEYH 200 0 to 300 0 C Pt100 GOST Pt100G 200 0 to 600 0 C Cu100 GOST Cu100G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu50 GOST Cu50G 200 0 to 200 0 C Cu10 GOST Cu10G 200 0 to 200 0 C Resistance Temperature Detector 0 25 m
259. tact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs Installed Module Rating Main module AC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 3 15 A Type Timelag T Main module DC power supply Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 6 3 A Type Timelag T PWM module Maximum rated voltage 250 V maximum rated current 3 15 A Type Timelag T IM MW100 01E 4 17 eoueuejure y pue Punoouse qno4j 4 6 System Initialization Perform this procedure to initialize the settings on the MW100 The following types of initialization are available Initialization Type Type Level Items Initialized Initialization using dip switches m All settings Initialization using communication 0 Setting other than configurated module commands information 1 Setting other than the following item IP address host name subnet mask default gateway baud rate parity bit stop bit data length handshake and configurated module infomation Initialization Procedure Using Dip Switches 1 Turn OFF the power to the MW100 2 Check that the switch 5 of dip switch 1 on the main module is OFF 3 Turn OFF the power to the MW100 After the 7 segment LED indicates the power ON self check bF is displayed 4 Check the status of step 3 then turn the power OFF 5 Turn switch 5 of dip switch 1 ON Initialization using communication commands Using a Browser For information about initializati
260. ted Cancelled out Input voltage M J instantaneous value DC voltage average value Integration time For example if the integration time is 20 ms signals having frequencies of 50 Hz and integer multiples of 50 Hz can be rejected Likewise if the integration time is 16 67 ms signals having frequencies of 60 Hz and integer multiples of 60 Hz can be rejected If the integration time is 100 ms signals having 10 Hz and integer multiples of 10 Hz can be rejected The commercial power supply is one of the noise sources By setting these integration times commercial power noise of 50 Hz or 60 Hz can be eliminated On the MW100 the integration time is set as shown below 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Measurement Integration Rejected Frequencies and Notes Interval Time 10 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples 16 67 ms 60 Hz and its integer multiples 50 ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 67 or 20 ms ens 36 67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples 200 ms i 500 ms 100 ms _ 10 Hz and its integer multiples 1s 200ms Low pass filter with Fc 5 Hz 2 5 10 20 30 60s 6 CH Medium Speed 4 wire RTD Resistance Input Module 10 CH Middle Speed Universal Input Module Measurement Integration Interval Time 100 ms 200 ms Rejected Frequencies and Notes 1 67 ms
261. tegration TLOG PSUM TLOG PSUM 01 1 Finds the pulse integral of measured values on ch 011 The channels that can be specified in TLOG functions are the measurement and MATH channels excluding TLOG PSUM The channels that can be specified for a TLOG PSUM computation are the digital input channels CLOG Functions The CLOG computation computes the maximum minimum maximum minimum integral and average values of the specified channel group One function can be used per expression Type Operators Example Explanation Maximum value CLOG MAX CLOG MAX 001 010 Finds max of measured data on ch 001 to 010 Minimum value CLOG MIN CLOG MIN 001 003 Finds min of measured data on ch 001 and 003 Maximum value CLOG P P CLOG P P 002 009 Finds P P of the measured data on ch to minimum value 002 to 009 Mean value CLOG AVE CLOG AVE 011 020 Finds avg of measured data on ch 011 to 020 The channels that can be specified in CLOG functions are the measurement and MATH channels The number of channels which can be specified is to ten channels IM MW100 01E 1 45 suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 13 MATH Function M1 Option Conditional Expressions Type Operators Explanation Conditional expressions EXPR1 EXPR2 EXPR3 Execute expression 2 when expression 1 is true or expression 3 when it is false Other Type Operator Explanation Parentheses Specifies the order of operatio
262. ter Rejected Noise and Notes 10 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples 50 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 67 or 20 ms 2 5 10 20 30 60 s Cos EN 36 67 ms Trapezoidal 50 Hz or 60 Hz and their integer multiples 500 ms 100 ms Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples 1s Fc 5 Hz low pass filter When the measurement interval is 10 ms measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency noise is not rejected In such cases set the measurement interval to 50 ms or more For DC power set to 20 ms Reference junction compensation Switch external internal by channel includes remote RJC function 5 26 IM MW100 01E 5 4 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module Specifications Reference junction compensation accuracy When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 C and when the temperature of the input terminal is balanced Type R S W 1 C Type K J E T N L U TXK 0 5 C Type N AWG14 PLATINEL NiNiMo WRe3 25 W AWRe26 1 C Note The internal reference junction compensation is fixed to 0 C for type B and PR40 20 Maximum input voltage DC voltage at 1 V range or less TC RTC and DI contact x10 VDC continuous Other measurement ranges 120 VDC continuous Normal mode voltage DC voltage TC DI LEVEL 1 2 times the range rating o
263. ter with Fc 5 Hz When the measurement interval is 100 ms measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency noise is not rejected In such cases set the measurement interval to 200 ms or more IM MW100 01E 2 29 2 10 Measures Against Noise on the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit First Order Lag Filter For noise sources other than power supply noise the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit is equipped with a first order lag filter having output characteristics indicated in the figure below against step input For the filter setting the time constant is determined by selecting filter coefficient N for the measurement interval Step input Output characteristics ER Re 63 2 of the output value 0 lt gt Time constant Filter coefficient measurement interval x filter coefficient N Measurement Interval s Selectable Time Constants s N 5 N 10 N 20 N 25 N 40 N 50 N 100 0 01 0 05 0 1 0 2 0 25 0 4 0 5 1 0 05 0 25 05 1 1 25 2 2 5 5 0 1 0 5 1 2 2 5 4 5 10 0 2 1 2 4 5 8 10 20 0 5 2 5 5 10 125 20 25 50 1 5 10 20 25 40 50 100 2 10 20 40 50 80 100 200 5 25 50 100 125 200 250 500 10 50 100 200 250 400 500 1000 20 100 200 400 500 800 1000 2000 30 150 300 600 750 1200 1500 3000 60 300 600 1200 1500 2400 3000 6000 If the first order lag filter is applied to the input signal low pass filter frequency characteristics shown in the figure below are attained Cutoff fre
264. tervals the MW100 time is corrected by 1 second at 10 second intervals This is effective when the shortest measurement interval within a unit is two seconds or more However if the time between the server and MW100 is different by 10 minutes or more the time is not applied Sends e mail according to alarm activation release specified time intervals file creation time time at which free memory space drops below specified amount time power turned ON times errors occur and other times Two mail recipient locations can be set multiple addresses using up to 150 characters IM MW100 01E uoneoyioedg B 5 2 Main Module Specifications FTP function Acting as a client measured values computed values thinned value files data acquisition logs and alarm summaries in the CF card can be transferred Up to two recipients a primary and secondary recipient can be specified using up to 64 characters The file is sent upon creation of the file The files are sent to the primary recipient first and if transmission fails they are sent to the secondary recipient If transmission to the secondary recipient also fails the file is held in memory up to eighteen files that failed to be sent are held and transmission is retried after the next file is created or when the power is turned on assuming there are files in the CF card If transmission fails more than eighteen times old files are overwritten with new ones When acting as the
265. than 1 5 m the distance to the floor If the cable hangs longer than 1 5 m secure the cable to the installation panel or some other location Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the universal input modules Doing so can damage the modules Maximum input voltage Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC TC RTD and DI x10 VDC Other voltage ranges x120 VDC Maximum common mode voltage 600 VACrms 50 60 Hz 2 8 IM MW100 01E 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module and the output terminals of the 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module Doing so can damage the modules Maximum input voltage 10 CH High Speed Digital Input module 10 VDC D05 x50 VDC D24 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output module 250 VAC or 250 VDC Maximum common mode voltage 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the 4 Wire RTD resistance input module Doing so can damage the modules Maximum input voltage Voltage range less than or equal to 1 VDC RTD resistance and DI contact x10 VDC Other measuring ranges x120 VDC Maximum common mode voltage 600 VACrms 50 60 Hz Do not apply a voltage exceeding the value indicated below to the input terminals of the strain input modules Doing so
266. the RTD 1 mA 60 mV range connect 60 Q to the input terminal of CH5 When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 200 mV range connect 200 Q to the input terminal of CH6 When calibrating the RTD 1 mA 600 mV range connect 300 Q to the input terminal of CH4 When calibrating the RTD 0 25 mA 600 mV range connect 2400 Q to the input terminal of CH5 When calibrating the RTD 0 25 mA 1 V range connect 3000 Q to the input terminal of CH6 When calibrating the range of the 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Module B12 B35 and NDI The clamp terminal B12 B35 and NDIS terminal NDI are connected with the 4 gauge method see next page Use a resistance of 120 Q for resistors R1 through R3 and connect a resistance to R4 equivalent to the Zero or Full value To correctly calibrate the range do so in the order Zero then Full ZERO FULL Calibration range Resistors R4 Resistor R4 Resistance value accuracy ZERO 120 000 Q 120 000 Q 0 005 0 3 ppm C 2000 uSTR 120 000 Q 117 154 Q 0 005 0 3 ppm C 20000 uSTR 120 000 Q 113 010 Q 0 005 0 3 ppm C 200000 uSTR 120 000 Q 80 000 Q 0 005 0 3 ppm C The Full calibration value of the 2000 uStrain range is equivalent to 12000 uStrain The Full calibration value of the 20000 uStrain range is equivalent to 30000 uStrain The Full calibration value of the 200000 uStrain range is equivalent to 200000 uStrain 4 14 IM MW100 01E 4 4 Calibration
267. thermocouple 3 wire RTD DI contact LEVEL Number of inputs 10 Input method Floating unbalanced input insulation between channels b A D resolution Measuring range and accuracy terminal common for RTD 16 bits 20000 6000 The accuracy applies to standard operating conditions Ambient temp 23 2 C ambient humidity 55 10 RH supply voltage 90 to 250 VAC power frequency 50 60 Hz 1 warm up time at least 30 minutes without adverse conditions such as vibrations Measurement Rated Measurement Accuracy Highest Input Range Measurement Integration Time 16 67 ms isarat Tis er ON Resolution Type Range or More dd 1 digit 20 mV 20 000 to 20 000 mV _ 0 05 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 25digits TV 60 mV 60 00 to 60 00 mV 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 nV 200 mV 200 00 to 200 00 mV _ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 uV 2V 2 0000 to 2 0000 V 0 05 of rdg 5 digits 0 1 of rdg 10digits 100 uV 6v 6 000 to 6 000 V 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 1mV DC voltage 20 y 20 000 to 20 000 V 0 0596 of rdg 2 digits 1mV 100 V 100 00 to 100 00 V ___ 0 05 of rdg 2 digits 10 mV 60mV high res 0 000 to 60 000 mV 0 05 of rdg 20 digits 0 196 of rdg 100 digits iuV 1V 1 0000 to 1 0000 V 0 0526 of rdg 2 digits 0 1 of rdg 10 digits 100uV 6V hig
268. time environment version 1 4 or later Version 1 4 recommended Java might not be installed on the following operating systems Windows 2000 SP4 or later Windows XP SP2 or later If not installed you can install it fom the MW100 User s Manual CD MW100 Operation Screens The operation screens of the MW100 main module consist of Monitor screens enabling operations in Measurement mode Setting screens that are mainly used in Setting mode and Status screens for mode changes Top Screen Monitor Single Screen Dual Screen Setting Channel Setting System Setting Display Setting Communication Setting Status Measurement Recording and MATH status changes When entering settings the pages for all setting items are displayed but there may be settings or items that cannot be entered depending on the installed modules and options IM MW100 01E 3 1 uoysinboe ejeg pue Humas BH 3 1 Connection Environment By Top rosoft Internet Explorer E EI Fie Edt View Favorites Tools Help L4 Qs Q i3 A G D seo erem qe C iu EB Address http 192 168 1 10 webjindex shtml z Eco Links JT MAASTE KOGAWA G GMASTER DATA ACQUISITION UNIT Yo Top Monitor Setting 00000000000 Single Screen Channel Setting Dual Screen System Setting SSN iris ctos L T T mmm Measurement sroe E Math sroe E Recording sroe z Apply f ore
269. ting If servicing is necessary or if the instrument is not operating correctly after performing the corrective actions below contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer The 7 segment LED does not illuminate Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section The power switch is not ON Turn ON the power switch 2 5 The supply voltage is too low Check whether the voltage is within the supply voltage 2 5 rating range The fuse is blown Servicing required x The power supply is broken Servicing required The 7 segment LED blinks repeatedly Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section The power supply is shorted inside the Remove the input output module one by one and 2 3 input output module determine thebroken module servicing required The power supply is shorted inside the main Replace the main module Servicing required 2 3 module The MW100 cannot be detected from the PC or cannot be detected with the Search button Possible Problem Corrective Action Ref section The LINK LED does not turn ON Replace the Ethernet cable 1 3 The cable is broken The LINK LED does not turn ON Check the hub s power supply If it still does not work 1 3 There is a problem with the hub replace the hub and check the hub s operation The LINK LED does not turn ON Check whether the PC can connect to the network 1 3 There is a problem with the PC Replace the PC s NIC The ACT LED does not turn ON
270. tings Measurement Operation Settings From the top screen click System Setting gt Measurement Setting Measurement Group Settings Select the measurement interval from the Interval list Set a measurement interval for each group number Measurement Module Settings Sets the integral time and measurement group assignments for each module See each modulels specifications for the measurement interval and integral times that can be set on them 1 Select the group you wish to assign in the Interval Group list 2 Select an integral time of AUTO 50 Hz or 60 Hz in the A D Integration Time list This setting is enabled from the measurement interval Click the Apply button This enables the settings changes Note The measurement interval that is assigned to the measurement group number is interval is short lt meas group1 lt meas group2 lt meas group 3 lt interval is long Top gt System Setting gt Measurement Setting Interval Group No Interval Rp ws zl ons s B sos Measurement Module Module No Interval A D Integration Group Time o z Jauto gt ff s sl fe darna Bos dara L 4L a NMa a Apply Computation Operation Settings From the top screen click System Setting gt MATH Setting MATH Interval Settings Select the measurement group number in the Interval Group list This becomes the interval that is assigned to the selected group number Set a value that is the same
271. tion Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V Effects of magnetic field The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC 50 60 Hz 400 A m is 2 of range or less Effect of position Horizontal with the feet at the bottom is the rule 5 38 IM MW100 01E 5 7 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Specifications General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 60 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C 5 to 30 RH for 50 to 60 C External Dimensions Units mm B12 B35 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is x0 3 mm IM MW100 01E 5 39 uoleoyioads 5 8 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module Specifications Style number 1 D05 S2 D24 Input type D05 Contact non voltage contact open collector and LEVEL 5 V logic D24 LEVEL 24 V logic Number of inputs 10 Input format D05 Pull up at approx 5 V approx 5 KQ non isolated between channels D24 No isolation between channels Measurement interval Select 10 ms 50 ms 100 ms 200 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5 s 10s 20 s 30s or 60 s Filter Measurement interval of 5 s or less Use the wi
272. tion channel A300 No decimal place information 34001 Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A001 Float 34002 Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A001 34599 Lower byte of computed data of computation channel A300 34600 Upper byte of computed data of computation channel A300 Includes decimal place information 35001 Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A001 Bit string 35300 Alarm status of computed data of computation channel A300 Register structure and alarm status value Same as alarm status of measured data IM MW100 01E 5 13 5 2 Main Module Specifications Input Registers Data Data Type 39001 Year Int 16 39002 Month 39003 Day 39004 Hours 39005 Minute 39006 Second 39007 Milliseconds 39008 DST O 1 Hold Registers Data Data Type 40001 Lower byte of communication input channel C001 Float 40002 Upper byte of communication input channel C001 40599 Lower byte of communication input channel C300 40600 Upper byte of communication input channel C300 Modbus error response The main unit returns the following error codes to the master instrument Code Function Operation 1 Function code invalid Requested non supported function 2 Invalid register number Attempted to read write registers for which no corresponding channels could be found 3 Invalid number of registers The specified number of registers was zero Could not be executed
273. tions to Modbus devices MW100 Data Acquisition Unit client Modbus machine server Modbus machine server Note Using the Web monitor or other communciation functions while using the Modbus function may affect the Modbus communication response IM MW100 01E 1 3 1 1 System Overview Main Module The main module is equipped with power supply connectors a power switch Ethernet ports and other devices facilitating supply of power to and control of the input output modules and connection to networks It also has Start and Stop keys meaning that since data can be saved to a CF card data can be acquired offline Data acquisition via serial communication is also possible by adding the RS 232 or RS 422A 485 serial communication option Input Output Modules The following eleven types of modules are available A screw terminal plate and separately installed screw terminal block both sold separately are available as accessories for the 10 CH Medium Speed Universal Input Module and the 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module MX110 UNV H04 Minimum measurement interval 10 ms except 50 ms for temperature measurement Maximum number of inputs 4 inputs Input types DC voltage TC 3 wire RTD and DI LEVEL contact Minimum measurement interval 100 ms Maximum number of inputs 10 inputs
274. to 100 V Output accuracy of output range 0 0196 1uV or less Resistance standard Must meet the following specifications ADR3204 by Alpha Electronics or equivalent Resistance setting range 0 1 to 3000 Resistance accuracy of resistance setting range 0 01 2mQ or less Resolution 0 001 Q Bridge head Yokogawa Electric 319300 Digital multimeter Must meet the following specifications 7562 by Yokogawa or equivalent Accuracy 0 0196 or less Calibration Procedure gy ug Eos Eton E 8o nog Ero mro E m 1 Wire the standard and instrument to be calibrated as shown in the figure below 2 Turn ON the power while holding down user function key 1 on the MW100 The unit enters Calibration mode 3 Allow a sufficient warm up time for the MW100 Data Acquisition Unit thirty minutes or more 4 Confirm that the ambient temperature and humidity meet the standard operating conditions 5 After setting up communications between the PC and the MW100 start the MW100 Calibration software and perform calibration For instructions on the calibration software see the MW100 Viewer Software User s Manual IM MW180 01E 6 Toexit Calibration mode turn the power OFF Wiring Diagram When calibrating the DC voltage range of the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input module When calibrating 0 V When calibrating a range other than 0 V Carry out calibration for each input terminal Short
275. tput 5 ioter nere nta commercial power supply common specifications communication RES communication command error eene 4 6 communication erTOF oto edere cette tdt e pc communication errors T communication input channels esses 5 4 communication input data eseeeeeeeee 3 20 communication input function eeeseeenes 5 11 communication output function s 5 11 communication setting communication specifications seesseessses 1 15 communication test esfis inas anpe iiA aana EEEN 3 12 communication timeout function ooo eee eens 3 35 computed data 1 17 computed value reset 1 47 computed values clear eene 1 47 conditional expressions eee eee eee eee eeeee tee eeeeeee 1 46 connecting Signal wires essesseeeee 2 6 connector 1 10 2 4 COVEN ON eroen RERTREREERETS 2 24 cutoff frequehGy riri tete tren 2 30 D Page data acquisition logs sese 5 21 data length 2 27 data transfer settings 9 5 date and UME ics i rper einen terne de EH ERE 3 9 DC VONAGE e 1 23 1 26 1 29 DC voltage current standard ssss 4 12 4 16 DE EN MT 3 22 dedicated protocol
276. tput operation of the analog and PWM output modules Output upon Startup and Error Occurrence Output Selection Notation Actions Hold previous value LAST Holds the last value output Output preset value PRESET Outputs an arbitrarily specified output value Output Format In the output format below current analog output module or pulse wave duty PWM output module is output Transmission output Analog or PWM output occurs according to the measured or computed values from the specified channel of the same unit All input modules can be specified but not output modules Command output When commands are received from the PC the instrument outputs analog or PWM signals accordingly Once the power is turned ON and the unit is able to perform communication command output becomes possible For transmission output within a unit after measurement or computation starts the output values are updated upon transmission output Output on Disabled Channels Type of Disabled Channel Output Channels changed from enabled to Holds the last output value when channel was disabled through setting changes active Channels invalid upon startup Output according to settings upon startup The timing at which changes applied to the output module take effect is according to the events below Ex When changing settings from transmission output within a unit to command output the last value of transmission output within a unit i
277. ts from DATA0000 to DATAxxxx xxxx is automatically generated from 0000 to 9999 Saving Measured Data and Computed Data Files can be created for every measurement group An individual file is created for computed data For each measurement group you can select whether or not to perform the save operation The table below shows the approximate interval over which data can be saved to the CF card when one measurement interval is used Save Channel Measurement Interval Capacity of the CF Card 128 MB 512 MB 10 ch 10 ms 8 8 hours 35 3 hours 100 ms 3 7 days 14 8 days 1s 37 days 148 days Saving Thinned Data Data is saved at a specified thinning interval Thinning time 4 5 10 20 or 30 seconds or 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 or 30 minutes or 1 hour Select a thinning time from the above choices Recording Operation The following three recording operations are available for measured computed and thinned data Mode Display Operation Single SINGLE One file of a specified size is created on the CF card then recording stops Full stop FULLSTOP Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card is reached then writing to the card stops Rotate ROTATE Files of the specified size are created until the capacity of the card is reached then if the capacity is exceeded new data is written over the oldest data and the process continues IM MW100 01E suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B 1 3 Functions o
278. turned OFF channel number to Use E062 Invalid alarm type Enter an allowed alarm type E063 Invalid alarm relay number Set a relay number for alarm output relays E065 Cannot set hysteresis for a channel on which Set the channel number alarm type to something other than alarm are turned OFF OFF E070 Nonexistent channel specified in MATH Check whether a channel number outside of the allowable expression range was specified in the expression E071 Nonexistent constant specified in MATH Check whether a MATH constant outside of the allowable expression range was specified in the expression E072 Invalid syntax found in MATH expression Check whether the syntax of the expression is correct E073 Too many operators for MATH expression Reduce the number of operators E074 Invalid order of operators Check whether the relationship between the operators used in the expression satisfies proper syntax E075 Upper and lower limits of MATH span cannot be Set a different value for the upper and lower limits of the MATH equal span E080 Incorrect MATH group format Check whether the MATH group format is correct E081 Incorrect channels for MATH group Check whether there are any channels outside the allowable range specified in the MATH group E082 Too many channels for MATH group Reduce the number of channels specified in the MATH group E090 Incorrect break point format Use the correct break point format E091 Time value of break point exceeds the setting Se
279. um Yes specified in reverse Setting span minimum maximum No same value specification Overview of Output Operation When Setting Holding of Previous Value of Transmission Output Previous value held Previous value Value held Output value Power ON Measurement Measurement Measurement start stop restarts or Transmission output or Transmission output execute disabled execute enabled IM MW100 01E 5 45 uoneoyioedg eo 5 12 10 CH Medium Speed Digital Output Module Specifications Style number S1 Number of outputs 10 Contact mode A contact SPST Update interval 100 ms minimum not synchronized to the measurement interval Contact capacity 250 VDC 0 1 A 250 VAC 2 A or 30 VDC 2A resistance load Contact life 100 000 times at rated load typical 20 000 000 times at no load typical The contact life varies depending on the load conditions and the environment in which it is used Insulation resistance Between output terminals and earth terminal 20 MO or more 500 VDC Between output terminals 20 MQ or more 500 VDC Withstand Voltage 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between the output terminal and earth 2300 VAC 50 60 Hz for one minute between output terminals Maximum common mode voltage 250 VACrms 50 60 Hz Power consumption Approx 2 W when all relays are turned ON Terminal type Clamp attached and removed in units of 5 channels Applicable wire size 0 08 to 2 5 mm AW
280. under Periodic Report Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt Mail Client Setting 2 Subject Sender MW100 ALARM mw O0user daqmaster com Recipient 1 mwiOduser2 daqmestercom Recipient 2 Im O0user3 daqmaster com Eee Do s Alarm Channel Set nop OU C C C O OC Instantaneous Data M Attach oman 7 Mada An Notion 7 3 Power Fae Noein Interval 24 v h Ref Time 0 J0 Instantaneous Data M Attach Apply Time Synchronization Client Settings Enter these settings to automatically synchronize the time 1 o9 oN 6 From the top screen click Communication Setting SNTP Client Setting Select the SNTP Client Function check box to enable the function Enter the name of the NTP server in the Server box under SNTP Server Enter the SNTP server port number in the Port box Enter a reference time to be queried Time box under Query Action Next select a query time interval in the Interval list Click the Apply button Top gt Communication Setting gt SNTP Client Setting Server Port sntp daqmaster com 123 Ref Time Jo Interval Apply 3 34 IM MW100 01E 3 14 Network Utility Settings Server Settings These settings enable the various server functions Keep Alive Function Select the TCP Keep Alive check box to enable the function Communication Timeout Function 1 Select the Application Timeout check box to enable the functio
281. unications opened successfully Holds the output value last output value when communications were cut and restored for the 2nd or more time Communication disconnected successfully Holds the output value last output value Output Operation during Measurement and When Performing Transmission Output Transmission output execution ON in the table is when the transmission output control is ON Transmission output execution OFF in the table is when the transmission output control is OFF Output Setup Status Output Operation Transmission Meas stop Measurement start Transmission output start or output within output value hold unit depending on the transmission output execution on off status on transmission output starts off output value held Measuring Measurement stop Holds the output value last output value Measuring Transmission output execution Transmission start off on Transmission output execution Holds output value on off last output value Command Meas stop Measurement start No effect output Measuring Measurement stop No effect Measuring Transmission output execution No effect off on Transmission output execution No effect on off Output Operation during an Abnormality and after Recovery from the Abnormality Output Operation during an Abnormality by Module Abnormal Module Display Status Output Operation Main mo
282. urrence MATCH TIME Match time number User function key USER KEY Keys number The following Actions are available The items that can be set differ according to the events and event detection method suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 B IM MW100 01E Action Notation Detection Method Edge Level Recording start MEMORY START Oo Oo Recording stop MEMORY STOP Oo Computation start MATH START Oo Oo Computation stop MATH STOP Oo Clear computed values MATH CLEAR Oo Reset computed values MATH RESET Oo Reset MATH on specified MATH RST GR1 Oo MATH group number MATH RST GR2 Gr 1 7 MATH RST GR3 MATH RST GR4 MATH RST GR5 MATH RST GR6 MATH RST GR7 Trigger occurrence on TRIGGER1 Oo specified number TRIGGER2 TRIGGERS3 Alarm ACK ALARM ACK Oo Flag FLAG Oo Oo Reset timer of specified TIMER1 RESET Oo number 1 6 TIMER2 RESET TIMER3 RESET TIMERA4 RESET TIMER5 RESET TIMER6 RESET Write message MESSAGE 1 Oo on specified number MESSAGE2 MESSAGES MESSAGE4 MESSAGE5 Save specified file FILE_SAVE O Load specified file FILE_LOAD Oo Cannot be selected when the event is Recording start Cannot be selected when the event is User function key Event detection methods Method Notation Description Edge EDGE Edge event Level LEVEL State event 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Log Information Saving the Data Acquisition Log File While recording is stopped information related to operatio
283. urrent 10 nA or less Withstand voltage 1000 VACrms 50 60 Hz for one minute between input terminals DC voltage and DI 620 VACrms 50 60 Hz for one minute between input terminals RTD and resistance 3700 VACrms 50 60 Hz for one minute between the input terminal and earth terminal Input signal source resistance DC voltage 2 kQ or less Resistance and RTD ranges 10 Q or less per line same for all ranges Shunt capacity 0 01 uF or less when using RTD and resistance ranges Power consumption Approx 1 2 W External dimensions Approx 57 W x 131 H x 151 D mm including the terminal cover Weight Approx 0 5kg Terminal type Clamp terminal board is detachable Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 Effects of Operating Conditions The specifications below apply when the integration time is 16 67 ms or more Warm up time At least 30 minutes after power up Effects of ambient temperature The effect received by changes in 10 degree increments of the ambient temperature is 0 0596 of rdg 0 05 of range or less However for Cu10 Q 0 296 of range 1 digit Effects of power fluctuation Meets the accuracy specifications for AC power supply in the range 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 V Effects of magnetic field The fluctuation in external magnetic fields for AC 50 60 Hz 400 A m is 0 196 of rdg 10 digits or less Effects from the signal source resistance Effect from fluctuation in DC voltage
284. user specified string Notification of power ON Power Failure user specified string Error notification ERROR user specified string Fixed time report Periodic Data user specified string Test Test user specified string E mail Retransmission If e mail transmission fails it will be retried two more times at about thirty to sixty second intervals If retransmission fails twice the e mail is deleted without being sent Retransmission is not performed if the e mail type is Test Example of an E Mail Transmission Alarm notification e mail From mwl0Quser daqmaster com Date Fri 25 Mar 2005 19 57 00 Subject Alarm Summary To mwlOOuser28daqmaster com Alarm Summary Time DATE 05 03 25 Md Mail header mwl00user3 daqmaster com Date and time TIME 19 56 32 lt Alarm Summary gt 01 2h on 04 4H off when alarm occurs 33 2r on A005 2H off CH Data N 01 mV 12345E 1 N 04 mV 12345E 1 N 05 mV 12345E 1 Alarm contents N A001 12345678E 1 N A002 12345678E 1 Power supply ON notification e mail Instantaneous measured and computed values From mwl0Quser daqmaster com Date Fri 25 Mar 2005 19 57 00 Subject Power Faliure To mwlOOuser28daqmaster com Power Faliure Power Off DATE 05 03 24 1 0300 Mail header mwl00user38daqmaster com Date time TIME 19 58 28 J lt Power On gt DATE 05 03 25
285. ut Module Specifications General Specifications Operating temperature range 20 to 50 C Operating humidity range 20 to 80 RH for 20 to 40 C 10 to 50 RH for 40 to 50 C External Dimensions Units mm 150 8 If not specified the tolerance is 3 However in cases of less than 10 mm the tolerance is 0 3 mm Handling Abnormal Data Abnormal Data Types Output value Data upon startup Preset value or previously held value can be selected Data upon error occurrence Preset value or previously held value can be selected OVER Duty 5 of the output Full Span OVER Duty 596 of the output Full Span OVER conditions When duty exceeds 0 000 to 100 000 When the input channel is sOVER in the case of transmission output 5 44 IM MW100 01E 5 11 Operations Common to the 8 CH Medium Speed Analog Output Module and the 8 CH Medium Speed PWM Output Module Settings Related Specifications by Module Setting channel Setting Contents Settings Remarks Module Output Channel Span AO V 10 000to 10 000V AO PWM Setting range AO mA 0 000 to 20 000 mA PWM 0 000 to 100 000 Preset value AO V 11 000 to 11 000V Command output Setting range AO mA 0 000 to 22 000 mA specification Max value also same as range on left PWM 90 000 to 100 000 Setting span minimum and maxim
286. utation between channels DELTA Linear scaling SCALE MATH M1 Option Expressions using measured and computed data as variables can be entered and executed on channels dedicated for computation and the results can be displayed and saved Computations are executed every measurement interval shortest interval is 100 ms For details see section 1 13 MATH Functions M1 Option IM MW100 01E 1 3 Functions of the Main Module Remote RJC RRJC Burnout Alarms When the item to be measured is located at a great distance you can setup relay terminals near the item measure between the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module reference channel using thermocouples and use the resultant value as the reference junction compensation of the temperature measurement By connecting the relay terminal and the input terminal of the universal input module using copper wires and connecting the item to be measured and the relay terminal using thermocouples you can make temperature measurements without having to use large quantities of high cost thermocouples MW100 Relay terminal to be furnished by the user suonoung jo uoneuejdx3 Thermocouple Reference channel Copper wire Thermocouple Copper wire Thermocouple Input terminal Use the same type of thermocouples When the input mode is set to thermocouple TC you can set the burnout detection behavior Measured
287. values become range over during detection Detection Behavior Notation No detection OFF Measured values fixed at range over UP Measured values fixed at range over DOWN The main module compares the measured values against preset alarm values and outputs alarm signals based on the result from the digital output module The following four types of alarms can be output Type Notation Actions Upper limit alarm H Generates an alarm when the measured value exceeds the alarm value Lower limit alarm L Generates an alarm when the measured value falls below the alarm value Differential upper limit alarm DH Generates an alarm when the difference between the during differential computation measured values of two alarms exceeds the alarm value Differential lower limit alarm DL Generates an alarm when the difference between the during differential computation measured values of two alarms falls below the alarm value High limit on rate of change RH Generates and alarm when the rate of change in alarm rising measured values exceeds the alarm value Low limit on rate of change RL Generates and alarm when the rate of change in alarm falling measured values falls below the alarm xvalue Alarm Value Hysteresis You can set a width hysteresis to the values used to activate and release alarms Alarm hysteresis can prevent frequent activation and release of alarms when the measured value is unstable ar
288. wever when using the SNTP time synchronization function the integral times below are used Bundi pue uonejeisu 6 CH Medium Speed 4 wire RTD Resistance Input Module 10 CH Middle Speed Universal Input Module Measurement Integration Rejected Frequencies and Notes Interval Time 100 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples 200 ms 16 67 ms 60 Hz and its integer multiples 500 ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 6 or 20 ms 1 36 67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples 5s 100 ms 10 Hz and its integer multiples 10 20 30 60 s 200 ms Low pass filter with Fc 5 Hz Because the power supply frequency noise is not rejected measured values may fluctuate particularly for temperature measurements using thermocouples If this happens make the measurement interval longer or use the 4 CH High Speed Universal Input Module 4 CH Medium Speed Strain Input Module Measurement Integration Rejected Frequencies and Notes Interval Time 100 ms 1 67 ms 600 Hz and its integer multiples 16 67 ms 60 Hz and its integer multiples 200 ms 20 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Auto Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 6 or 20 ms 500 ms 36 67 ms 50 Hz and 60 Hz and their integer multiples I 100ms 10 Hz and its integer multiples 5 10 20 30 60s 200 ms Low pass fil
289. would be 20 mm 0 003998 mm 2 uSTR 10005 uSTR in other words for 1 mm an output of 10005 uSTR 20 mm 500 25 uSTR mm can be obtained Thereafter in the same manner if you wish to measure with a scale of 2 mm to 15 mm the settings are Scale minimum 2 Scale maximum 15 Units mm therefore Span minimum 2 x 500 25 uSTR mm 1000 5 uSTR Span maximum 15 x 500 25 uSTR 7503 75 uSTR would be appropriate settings Since the measurement range is the 20000 uSTR range the resolution on the MW100 comes to 1 uSTR so we round to the following Span minimum 1001 uSTR Span maximum 7504 uSTR 1 34 IM MW100 01E 1 8 Functions of the 10 CH High Speed Digital Input Module The D05 module is equipped with ten inputs for measurement of no voltage contact open collector and 5 V logic inputs at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms The D24 module is equipped with ten inputs and measures 24 V logic inputs at a minimum measurement interval of 10 ms S Vs Terminal cover o Input terminal clamp terminal Measurement Input Types Measurement Input Type Notation No measurement SKIP Digital DI Measuring Range DI MX115 D05 Measurement Range Type Notation Rated Measuring Range LEVEL LEVEL OFF at 1 V or less and ON at 3 V or more Contact input CONTACT 100 Q or less ON 100 kQ or less OFF DI MX115 D24 Measurement Range Type Notation Rated Measuring Rang
290. xample For 4 to 20 mA input shut resistance values should be 250 0 0 1 Terminal type Clamp Applicable wire size 0 14 to 1 5 mm AWG26 to 16 Wiring the Strain Input Module 1 Gauge Method R fixed resistance resistance value of lead wire D d resistance value of strain gauge output voltage from bridge voltage applied to bridge B12 B35 NDI Jumper setting switch A V No 1 0 No 2 B L TN No 3 No 4 ccv LL 0 No 5 D H 0 OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON ON OFF OFF 1 Gauge 3 Wire Method R fixed resistance r resistance value of lead wire Rg resistance value of strain gauge e output voltage from bridge E voltage applied to bridge IM MW100 01E 2 11 Bui pue uonejeisul Hu 2 4 Connecting Signal Wires B12 B35 NDI Jumper setting switch A V No 1 R 4 No 2 g B L CO colt O No 5 D H d Bridge head 319300 OFF ON No 1 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 ON ON OFF ON OFF e Adjacent 2 Gauge Method fixed resistance resistance value of lead wire resistance value of strain gauge output voltage from bridge voltage applied to bridge
291. y 0 1 V Contact input ON for 100 Q or less OFF for 10 kQ or more 1 Measured using a measurement current of approximately 10 pA at 200 mV range Threshold level is approximately 0 1 V 2 The Pt500 resistance table is Pt100 x 5 and the resistance table for Pt1000 is Pt100 x 10 3 4 wire RTD 4 wire resistance Measurement interval integration time and filter Measurement Interval 100 ms Integration Rejected Noise and Notes Time Filter 600 Hz and its integer multiples 200 ms Rectangular 60 Hz and its integer multiples 500 ms 50 Hz and its integer multiples Automatically detects the power supply frequency and set 16 67 or 20 ms is Trapezoidal 50 Hz 60 Hz and their integer multiples 2s Rectangular 10 Hz and its integer multiples 5s Cos Fc 5 Hz low pass filter 10 20 30 60 s 1 When the measurement interval is 100 ms and 200 ms measured values may fluctuate since power supply frequency noise is not rejected In such cases set the measurement interval to 500 ms or more For DC power set to 20 ms 3 When synchronizing time by SNTP the integral time is set to 36 67 ms Also in this case noise of 50 Hz 60 Hz and their integer multiples is rejected When synchronizing time by SNTP the integral time is set to 100 ms Also in this case noise of 10 Hz and its integer multiples is rejected Maximum input voltage DC voltage at 1 V range or
292. y button This enables the settings changes Top Channel Setting AO PWM Channel Setting pa Pwo e TRANS v RR en pem p R pe m wv ws mij fox p jo fore 026 Mr oms zif fon f Jo m Dl eo D m Tm Di A3 LETT Apply 3 24 IM MW100 01E 3 9 Analog PWM Output Settings Output Operation Settings You can set the operation upon power ON and when an error occurs 1 From the top screen click System Setting gt AO PWM Preset Setting 2 Selectthe channel group you wish to set from the Channel List list Setting the Power ON Operation Select LAST or PRESET in the Power ON list under Preset Value When PRESET is selected the specified value is output in the output range setting Screen Setting the Operation upon Error Occurrence Select LAST or PRESET in the Error list under Preset Value When PRESET is selected the specified value is output in the output range setting Screen Top gt System Setting gt AO PWM Preset Setting Channel List 001 010 v No Preset Value Power On Error ara cara Apply IM MW100 01E 3 25 uoysinboe ejeg pue Dumes BH 3 9 Analog PWM Output Settings Meas Mode Transmission Output Control Turning Transmission Output ON and OFF for Analog Output PWM Output This is set if TRANS is selected for the output action in the output range s

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Online User Manual    4281/5881 Installation Instructions  「熱風コンベクション」& 「高温スチーム」採用 2段調理オーブンレンジ  John Lewis Spring return roller blind Fitting & operating instructions  Chapter 5.4 - Extracting installer source code and  Université Pierre et Marie Curie Processus stationnaires et prévision  attention  MODE D`EMPLOI  Crest Dual Fuel Sup Manual - Models 1500  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file